advertisement
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series
Software Technical Reference
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer
Software Technical Reference
Copyright and license
©2004 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Edition 1, 10/2004
Trademark credits
Adobe®, Acrobat®, PostScript®, and the
Acrobat logo® are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
The Bluetooth® trademarks are owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard
Company under license.
EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo® are US registered marks of the United
States Environmental Protection Agency.
HP-UX Release 10.20 and later and HP-
UX Release 11.00 and later (in both 32 and 64-bit configurations) on all HP 9000 computers are Open Group UNIX 95 branded products.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of
Linus Torvalds
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Pentium® is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Table of contents
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD for
Windows systems .................................................................................5
HP PCL 5e, PCL 6, and PS emulation drivers......................................8
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems..............9
Macintosh and Macintosh-compatible printing system.......................10
Additional driver availability.................................................................10
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series Printer User Guide ........................................12
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series Printing System Install Notes ............................13
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide..............................................................13
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide..........................................................13
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard..........................................................14
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition .....................................................15
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition....................................................15
Printing-system software ....................................................................21
Standalone drivers .............................................................................22
Other operating systems.....................................................................22
Software component availability .........................................................22
iii
iv
Configuration section...........................................................................42
Diagnostics section ............................................................................43
Network settings .................................................................................43
Print Quality Tools ..............................................................................48
Error Messages ..................................................................................50
Supported Media ................................................................................52
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site........................................62
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser.................................62
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection.............63
Windows operating systems................................................................63
Macintosh operating systems..............................................................64
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port .....................................65
Windows 98 or Windows Me...............................................................65
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003.........................................................................66
Remote firmware update through a Windows network .......................................66
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems .......................................................66
Remote firmware update by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.x only)...............................67
Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command .......................................68
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin .........................................68
Printer messages during the firmware update.....................................................69
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser....................................71
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection................71
Windows operating systems................................................................71
Macintosh operating systems..............................................................72
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port..............................................73
Windows 98 or Windows Me...............................................................73
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows 2000.....................................................................................73
Print-ready file printing by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.x only)..................................74
File printing by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only) ........................75
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command ..........................................75
v
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Document Defaults... driver tabs.........................................................92
Properties driver tabs..........................................................................93
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me....................................93
Default Print Settings ..........................................................................97
User Guide Print Settings ...................................................................99
Correct Order for Rear Bin ...............................................................100
Print on Both Sides ...........................................................................100
Automatically printing on both sides ................................100
Manually printing on both sides........................................101
Flip Pages Up ...................................................................................102
Booklet Printing.................................................................................102
Book and booklet printing.................................................103
Printing a Booklet ............................................103
Printing a book ................................................104
Pages per Sheet................................................................................104
Print Page Borders............................................................................105
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver..................106
Current Setting .................................................................107
Output Settings ................................................................107
Resolution........................................................107
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt).....107
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)............................108
Print all Text as Black .....................................108
Font Settings ....................................................................108
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver................108
Current Setting .................................................................109
vi
Graphic Settings ..............................................................109
Output Settings.................................................................109
Resolution........................................................109
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt).....110
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) ...........................110
Print all Text as Black .....................................110
Font Settings ....................................................................110
Print Document On setting ...............................................................112
% of Normal Size...............................................................................112
Watermarks drop-down menu ..........................................................113
First Page Only .................................................................................113
Current Watermarks ........................................................114
Watermark Message ........................................................115
Message Angle ................................................................115
Document preview image.................................................115
Font Attributes .................................................................115
Name................................................................115
Color.................................................................116
Shading ...........................................................116
Size..................................................................116
Style.................................................................116
Default settings ...............................................116
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................119
Name................................................................................121
Save, Delete, or Rename.................................................121
Custom size (width and height controls) .........................122
Custom width and height control limits.............................123
Paper and envelope icons...............................123
Dynamic measurement units ...........................................123
Close.................................................................................123
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................124
First Page ........................................................................125
Front Cover ......................................................................125
Other Pages......................................................................126
Last Page .........................................................................127
Back Cover.......................................................................128
vii
viii
Proof and Hold ..................................................................................134
Using a PIN for Private Job .............................................135
Using Job Storage features when printing.........................................................137
Releasing a Job Storage print job.....................................................137
Deleting a Job Storage print job........................................................138
Configuring the trays.........................................................................143
Paper Handling Options....................................................................145
Duplexing unit ..................................................................145
Allow Manual Duplexing...................................................146
Envelope Feeder..............................................................146
Mopier Enabled ................................................................146
Mopier mode and collation...............................146
Optional Paper Sources ..................................................147
Other Options ...................................................................................147
More Configuration Options..............................................147
Storage.............................................................148
Fonts................................................................148
Allow Scaling from Large Paper......................150
Alternative letterhead mode ............................150
Ignore Application Collation.............................150
Printer memory................................................150
Include Types in Application Source List ........150
Automatic configuration.....................................................................151
Access to print drivers in Windows NT 4.0........................................................152
Properties driver tabs........................................................................153
Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me......................153
Proof and Hold ..................................................................................162
Using a PIN for Private Job..............................................162
User Name .......................................................................................164
Using Job Storage features when printing.........................................................164
Releasing a Job Storage print job.....................................................165
Deleting a Job Storage print job........................................................165
Available PostScript Memory............................................................168
Output Protocol..................................................................................168
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job............................................................169
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ..............................................................169
Wait Timeout ....................................................................................169
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline.....................................169
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ...................................169
ix
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing) .....................................................170
Envelope Feeder...............................................................................171
Printer Hard Disk ..............................................................................171
Mopier Mode......................................................................................171
Accessory Output Bin........................................................................171
Printer Memory..................................................................................171
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Collated.............................................................................177
Advanced Printing Features..............................................................178
Print Optimizations ...........................................................................178
Printer Features ................................................................................178
Print All Text as Black.......................................................179
Send TrueType as Bitmap ...............................................179
REt....................................................................................179
Alternative Letterhead Mode............................................179
Graphics Mode.................................................................179
Layout Options .................................................................................180
Page Order.......................................................................180
Default Print Settings.........................................................................181
User Guide Print Settings .................................................................184
Type new Quick Set name here .......................................................185
Name................................................................................187
Paper Size .......................................................................187
Units..................................................................................187
Custom width and height control limits.............................187
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................188
x
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................189
Front Cover ......................................................................190
First Page ........................................................................191
Other Pages .....................................................................192
Last Page .........................................................................193
Back Cover ......................................................................194
Print Document On ...........................................................................197
% of Normal Size ..............................................................................198
Current Watermarks .........................................................................200
Watermark Message ........................................................................200
Message Angle .................................................................................200
Name................................................................................201
Color.................................................................................201
Shading.............................................................................201
Size...................................................................................201
Style..................................................................................201
Default settings ................................................................201
Correct Order for Rear Bin ...............................................................203
Print on Both Sides............................................................................203
Automatically printing on both sides ................................203
Manually printing on both sides........................................204
Flip Pages Up....................................................................................205
Booklet Layout...................................................................................206
Book and booklet printing.................................................206
Printing a booklet ............................................206
Printing a book ................................................206
Pages per Sheet................................................................................207
Print Page Borders ...........................................................................207
xi
xii
Proof and Hold ..................................................................................212
Using a PIN for Private Job..............................................213
Using Job Storage features when printing.........................................................215
Releasing a Job Storage print job.....................................................216
Deleting a Job Storage print job........................................................216
Form to Tray Assignment..................................................................218
Font Substitution Table.....................................................................219
External Fonts...................................................................................220
Installing external fonts.....................................................221
Removing external fonts...................................................221
Postscript options..............................................................................221
Available PostScript Memory............................................222
Output Protocol.................................................................222
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job...........................................223
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job..............................................223
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray .............................223
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray......................223
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts..............223
Job Timeout .....................................................................223
Wait Timeout ....................................................................223
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline....................224
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline...................224
Installable Options.............................................................................224
Automatic Configuration...................................................224
Envelope Feeder..............................................................225
Tray 3 ...............................................................................225
Tray 4 ...............................................................................225
Tray 5 ...............................................................................225
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) ....................................225
Allow Manual Duplexing...................................................225
Accessory Output Bin.......................................................225
Postscript Passthrough.....................................................225
Printer Hard Disk..............................................................226
Job Storage......................................................................226
Mopier Mode.....................................................................226
Mopier mode and collation...............................226
Printer Memory.................................................................227
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems ....................238
Installing from the printing-system software CD................................................238
Installing from a network or from downloaded files ..........................................239
Installing print drivers by using the Add Printer feature.....................................258
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows.....................................................259
Running the installer customization wizard.......................................259
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
To install the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS .....282
Setting up an AppleTalk networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x ...........................282
Setting up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x.................................283
xiii
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer dialog box sequence.................................286
Manually uninstalling HP Toolbox in Macintosh Operating Systems ................................301
xiv
1 Purpose and scope
Introduction
This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the printing-system software for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer.
This document is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer
Care Center (CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems (MIS) personnel, and HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer end users, as appropriate.
NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD.
This STR does not cover drivers that might be released for use by support personnel.
The following information is included in this technical reference:
■ Descriptions of drivers and platforms with system modifications
■ Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components
■ Descriptions of various topics associated with the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers, including engineering details
NOTE An addendum to this STR includes system modification information and descriptions of known software issues and workarounds.
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
●
Structure and availability of the software CD
Introduction 1
2
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer
The following table contains descriptions of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer models that are described in this STR. Product configurations might vary among countries/regions.
Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer
Feature
Performance
Memory
Model Specifications
■ HP LaserJet 4250 printer: 43 pages per minute (ppm) for A4-sized media;
45 ppm for letter-sized media
HP LaserJet 4350 printer: 52 pages per minute (ppm) for A4-sized media;
55 ppm for letter-sized media
■ 48 megabytes (MB) of memory for the HP LaserJet 4250 printer
■ 64 MB of memory for the HP LaserJet 4250n and 4250tn printers
■ 80 MB of memory for the HP LaserJet 4250dtn, 4250dtnsl and 4350n printers
■ 96 MB of memory for the HP LaserJet 4350dtn and 4350dtnsl printers
■ Can be expanded to 544 MB: 512 MB of DDR memory plus 32 MB of memory on the formatter board
■ Optional hard-disk drive can be added using an available EIO slot
User interface
Supported printer personalities
Storage features
Environmental features
■ Graphic display on control panel
■ Enhanced Help with animated graphics
■ The HP Embedded Web server (HP EWS) to gain access to support and order supplies (for network-connected printers)
■ HP Toolbox software to provide printer status and alerts, order supplies, show documentation and troubleshooting information, and print internal printer information pages
■ PCL 6
■ PCL 5e
■ MIME
■ Postscript emulation
■ Job storage
■ Personal identification number (PIN) printing (for printers that have a hard disk)
■ Fonts and forms
■ PowerSave setting
■ High content of recyclable components and materials
1 Purpose and scope
Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer (continued)
Feature Model Specifications
■ Energy Star® compliant
■ Blue Angel compliant
Fonts
Paper Handling
Accessories
Connectivity
■ 66 default TrueType fonts installed with typical installation
■ 92 additional postscript fonts available on the installation CD
■ HP Web Jetadmin supports forms and fonts on the disk
■ Prints on paper from 76 by 127 mm (3 by 5 inches) to 216 by 356 mm (8.5
by 14.0 inches) in size
■ Prints on media with weights from 60 g/m 2 to 200 g/m 2 (16 lb to 53 lb)
■ Prints on a wide range of media types including labels, transparencies, and envelopes
■ 500-sheet paper tray (tray 2)
■ Optional 500-sheet paper tray (tray 3); standard on the
HP LaserJet 4250tn, HP LaserJet 4250dtn, HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl, and the HP LaserJet 4350tn, HP LaserJet 4350dtn, and
HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer models
■ Optional 1500-sheet paper tray (tray 4)
■ Optional duplexing unit; standard on the following models:
■ HP LaserJet 4250dtn and HP LaserJet 4350dtn printer
■ HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl and HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer
■ 250-sheet face-down output bin
■ Optional 500-sheet stapler/stacker output accessory
■ Optional envelope feeder
■ 100-pin DDR memory DIMM (dual inline memory module)
■ Enhanced input/output (EIO) hard disk
■ Stapler unit
■ Storage cabinet (recommended for additional optional trays)
■ Optional HP Jetdirect embedded print server; standard on the following models:
■ HP LaserJet 4250n and HP LaserJet 4350n printer
■ HP LaserJet 4250tn and HP LaserJet 4350tn printer
■ HP LaserJet 4250dtn and HP LaserJet 4350dtn printer
■ HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl and HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer
■ Universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 connection
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer 3
Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer (continued)
Feature Model Specifications
■ HP Web Jetadmin software
■ Standard bidirectional extended capabilities port (ECP) type-B (IEEE
1284–compliant) parallel connection
■ The printer supports an auxiliary connection for paper handling input devices
Supplies
NOTE Both USB and parallel connections are supported, but cannot be used at the same time
■ The supplies status page contains information on toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining
■ The product uses a no-shake cartridge design
■ The product checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation
■ The product offers Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities (by using the HP EWS or the HP Toolbox software)
4 1 Purpose and scope
Printing-system software CD
This section contains information about the following topics:
●
●
Software features
This section contains information about the following topics:
●
●
●
●
●
Printing system and installer
The following sections contain information about the printing-system software and the installer on the software CD that came with the product.
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD for Windows systems
For the Microsoft® Windows® environment (Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003), the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printingsystem software CD provides an interactive software window that you can use not only to install the print drivers and related components, but also to gain access to online user documentation, a customization utility, Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® software, and optional HP software.
The following illustration shows the main screen of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD, which appears when you insert the software CD in your CD-ROM drive. If the screen does not appear when you insert the software CD, click Start , click Run , click Browse...
, navigate to the root directory of the software CD, and then double-click the SETUP.EXE file to start the installer.
Printing-system software CD 5
6
Figure 1-1 Installation software CD main screen
The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper-left panel and documentation options in the lower-left panel. As you move your cursor over each option, a description of the option appears above the product image.
NOTE The options on your product might vary from the illustration. install printer . This wizard guides you through the installation of your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software. You are given the choice of performing a Typical Installation, a Minimum
Installation, or a Custom Installation. If you select Typical Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you select Minimum Installation, only the components required for basic printing are installed. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the components that you want to install.
installer customization wizard . Use this wizard to customize the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 print driver installer by presetting the installation options in a response file. The installer that you have customized can then be used for silent, unattended installation.
NOTE For the HP Traditional PCL 5e drivers and all Windows NT 4.0 drivers, use HP Web
Jetadmin or the HP Driver Preconfiguration utility to create a silent installer.
register product . Use this option to register your product online. Using the Web registration, you can gain access to support and services, manage your profile, and sign up for free support alerts, driver notices, and personalized newsletters.
1 Purpose and scope
printer documentation . Use this option to view the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer user documentation. The following document options are available when you click this option:
■ user guide (interactive)
■ user guide (printer friendly)
■ install notes
■ hp driver preconfiguration user guide
■ embedded web server guide
■ hp jetdirect guide
NOTE If your system does not have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, clicking any of the links to documentation that is provided in the portable document format (PDF) file format opens a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader software that runs from the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD. The CD Browser version of Acrobat
Reader is in English only, but can be used to open localized versions of .PDF documents. The
Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on your computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive. Adobe Acrobat Reader is also available from www.adobe.com
.
support . To increase productivity and get the most use from your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer, view a list of optional software programs that are available for installation and links to HP Web sites.
The following options are available:
■ Click hp web jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a browserbased network-management tool.
■ Click supplies for information about ordering HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supplies.
■ Click product information for HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer support information and updates.
■ Click HP.com
to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services, support, drivers, and HP online stores.
Installer features
The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the product. The common installer is available for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
The common installer offers the following features:
■ The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD features an interactive software interface. See
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD for Windows systems .
■ Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a networked product in a single process.
■ The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You can use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printingsystem software CD.
Printing-system software CD 7
8
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD also includes the following features:
■ The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility
■ The HP Customization Utility for custom installations
■ The HP Toolbox
All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printingsystem installer. The installer automatically detects your language of choice and your operating system. You can select the type of installation that you prefer: Typical Installation, Minimum
Installation, or Custom Installation.
HP LaserJet print drivers
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 print drivers provide printing features and communication between the computer and the product. The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators who are working in the following operating environments:
■ Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows Me
■ Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
■ Apple Mac OS 9.x and later, and Mac OS X (V10.1 and later)
Automatic configuration, driver updates after a new configuration, and preconfiguration features are available with the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers.
NOTE For the latest information about the printing-system software components, view the readme files on the CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system software, view the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series Printing System Install Notes on the printingsystem software CD.
All of the drivers provide access to the paper-handling and print-quality features, and are described in chapters 3 and 4 of this guide.
HP PCL 5e, PCL 6, and PS emulation drivers
The following drivers are available on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD:
■ The HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
■ The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
■ The HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and
Windows NT 4.0.
■ The HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
NOTE If you select a Typical Installation during installation of the printing-system software, the HP PCL 6 driver is installed by default. You must use the Add Printer wizard to install any of the PCL 5 drivers.
1 Purpose and scope
Table 1-2 Print drivers included with the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer
Operating System 1 PCL 6 PCL 5e PS emulation
Windows 98, Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows Server 2003 X X X
1
Macintosh OS X
Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in your driver for information about the features that are available.
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 PCL 6 and PCL 5e print drivers supportWindows 98, Windows Me,
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. The
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 PS emulation driver software provides postscript feature support for the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer.
If you are using an HP traditional PCL driver, you can view the print driver version number by clicking the HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP traditional PCL 6 or HP traditional PCL 5e driver tabs:
■ Finishing
■ Effects
■ Paper
■ Job Storage
■ Basics
If you are using an HP unidriver in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 environments, follow these steps to find driver-version information:
1 Click Start .
2 Click Settings .
3 Click Printers and Faxes (in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) or Printers (in Windows
2000).
4 Right-click the printer icon.
5 Click Properties .
6 Click the About tab.
NOTE For a list of print drivers, updated HP printing-system software, and product support information, go to www.hp.com/support/lj4250 , or www.hp.com/support/lj4350 .
Printing-system software CD 9
10
Macintosh and Macintosh-compatible printing system
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing system for Macintosh is composed of the Print Center for OS X and the Apple LaserWriter driver for OS 9, which are provided with the operating system, and HPcreated PPD files. The driver uses these files to determine the features and postscript commands that the product supports. Bidirectional support in AppleTalk connections supports software autoconfiguration. The following are installable components:
■ The HP Color LaserJet Installer for Mac OS 9, and Mac OS X
■ The HP Color LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer
■ SYSTEM/EXTENSIONS/PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS (for Mac OS 9)
■ LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ (for Mac OS X)
■ Online Help, an HTML-based printer and utility help that can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center (in English only)
■ Install notes
NOTE The HP LaserJet Utility is a standalone utility that is not installed by the installer, but is available on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer software CD. It is an HP utility that is installed in the HP LaserJet folder of Mac OS 9 and provides configuration and management support for postscript. It can be found on the CD in a directory called “hp OS 9 LaserJet
Utility.”
Additional driver availability
All drivers on the printing-system CD are also available on the Web. The following drivers are available only on the Web site:
■ HP OpenVMS drivers. For further information, go to h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/
■ HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW). For further information, go to www.hp.com/go/ inpw_software
■ OS/2 PCL 5e/PCL 6 print driver
■ OS/2 PS print driver
■ UNIX® model scripts. For further information about UNIX model scripts, go to www.hp.com/go/ unixmodelscripts .
■ Tru64 UNIX printing. For further information, go to h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/
■ Linux drivers. For further information, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting .
■ SAP printing. For further information, go to www.hp.com/go/sap/print
NOTE The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2.
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers for Windows features automatic discovery and driver configuration for product accessories at the time of installation. Some supported accessories are the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
1 Purpose and scope
Update Now
If you have modified the configuration of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer since installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows NT
4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, or Windows XP hosts.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide , which is available at www.hp.com/support/lj4250 , or www.hp.com/support/lj4350 .
Information about HP Driver Preconfiguration is also available by going to www.hp.com/go/ hpdpc_sw , and then selecting Cross operating system (BIOS, Firmware, Diagnostics, etc.) .
HP LaserJet documentation
This section describes the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer documentation that is available to users and administrators.
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system documentation by operating system.
Table 1-3 Documentation availability
Document Windows
98/Me x
Windows
NT 4.0
x
Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003 x
Mac x HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series Printer User Guide
(.PDF file)
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series Printer User Guide
(.CHM file)
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series Printing System Install
Notes
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location. Some documents can be opened from the installer CD Browser. Others are found on the software CD and can be opened by navigating to the folder where they reside. Still others are available on the Web
Printing-system software CD 11
12 through links in the installer CD Browser or CD folders. Documents are available in the following file formats:
■ Portable Document Format (.PDF) . The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD includes Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing online documentation. If your system does not have
Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, clicking any of the links to documentation that is provided in the portable document format (PDF) file format opens an English version of Adobe
Acrobat Reader software that runs from the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software
CD. The Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on your computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive.
■ Compiled HTML (.CHM) . When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a Microsoft
HTML Viewer opens the file on your computer screen. The .CHM files can reside either on the printing-system software CD or on the Web.
■ Hypertext Markup (.HTM) . When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a Web browser opens the file on your computer screen. The .HTM files can reside either on the printingsystem software CD or on the Web.
■ Rich Text format (.RTF) . This is a text file. You can navigate to .RTF files and open them in
Microsoft Word or Microsoft WordPad.
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series Printer User Guide
The HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series Printer User Guide describes the basic features of the product.
To view this guide, click printer documentation on the installer CD Browser, and then click user guide (interactive) . The guide opens as a Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen version of the guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
The screen-readable version (.CHM) of the User Guide for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is also available on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD. To open the guide from the software CD, navigate to the <language> folder for your language, and then open the Manuals folder. In that folder, open the following file:
■ LJ4250_4350_USE_XXWW.CHM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. For instance, the file name for the
French version of the guide is LJ4250_4350_USE_FRWW.CHM.
To print the User Guide, click printer documentation on the installer CD Browser, and then click user guide (printer friendly) . The guide is provided as a .PDF file, which you can print.
This document is also available on the printing-system software CD. To open the .PDF version of the guide, navigate to the <language> folder for your language, and then open the Manuals folder. In that folder, open the following file:
■ LJ4250_4350_USE_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. For instance, the file name for the
French version of the guide is LJ4250_4350_USE_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
1 Purpose and scope
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series Printing System Install Notes
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series Printing System Install Notes is a document (in .HTM format) that contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical assistance.
To view this file from the software CD, click printer documentation on the main screen of the installer CD Browser, and then click install notes .
You can also open the file by inserting the software CD into the CD-ROM drive and navigating to
<language> . There, open the following file:
■ LJ4X50_INSTALL-NOTE_XXWW.HTM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. For instance, the file name for the
French version of the document is LJ4X50_INSTALL-NOTE_FRWW.HTM.
When you have the file open in a text editor (such as NotePad or WordPad), you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
The HP Embedded Web Server User Guide (in .PDF format) provides information about device status, settings, and networking for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer.
To view this guide, click printer documentation on the main screen of the installer CD Browser, and then click embedded web server guide .
You can also gain access to the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide by inserting the software CD into the CD-ROM drive, navigating to the <language> folder for your language, and then open the
Manuals folder. In that folder, open the following file:
■ EWS81_USE_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. In French, the file name is
EWS81_USE_FRWW.HTM.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
The HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide is a guide (in .PDF format) for preconfiguring drivers in network environments.
To view this guide, insert the printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive, navigate to english , and then open the Manuals folder. In that folder, open the following file:
■ PRECONFIG_SUPPORT_ENWW.PDF
NOTE The HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide is available only in English on the software CD.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
Printing-system software CD 13
14
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that contains information about connecting the product directly to a network.
To view this guide, click printer documentation on the main screen in the installer CD Browser, and then click hp jetdirect guide .
You can also gain access to the HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide by inserting the software CD into the CD-ROM drive, navigating to the <language> folder for your language, and then opening the
Manuals folder. In that folder, open the following file:
■ HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. In French, the file name is
HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard (in .HTM format) provides network administrators with information about options and installation settings for the Installer Customization Wizard.
You can gain access to the HP Device Installer Customization Wizard by inserting the software CD into the CD-ROM drive and navigating to the <language> folder for your language, and then opening the Manuals folder. In that folder, open the following file:
■ CUSTOMIZATION_README_XXWW.RTF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies in each language. In French, the file name is
CUSTOMIZATION_README_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
1 Purpose and scope
Structure and availability of the software CD
The software CD for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer contains a variety of files for installing the printing-system software on your computer. This section describes the files that are available on the software CD, as well as additional support and fulfillment information.
In-box file layout
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software consists of two partitions: one for installing the product onto Windows operating systems, and the other for Macintosh operating systems. The files include documentation files and files that are required to install and uninstall the printing-system components.
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition
The root directory in the Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file,
SETUP.EXE file, and the following directories and support files:
■ autorun
■ Fonts
■ HW
■ System32
■ Temp
■ toolbox
■ WebReg
■ Language directories for all the languages that are on the software CD
The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:
■ Drivers
■ Manuals
File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
To view the files, insert the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer software CD, right-click Start , click
Explore , and then select the CD-ROM drive.
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition
The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD are grouped by language and reside in the following directories:
■ Root directory
■ HP LASERJET INSTALLERS (for Macintosh operating systems)
■ PDF (for guides and manuals)
File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
Structure and availability of the software CD 15
16
Availability and fulfillment
This section provides information about the availability of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is available from
HP fulfillment centers.
In-box CDs
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD is available in five versions. The following list shows the five versions of the software CD and the languages they support:
■ CD AM - Americas and Europe:
■ DE = German (Deutsch)
■ EN = English
■ ES = Spanish (Español)
■ FR = French (Français)
■ IT = Italian (Italiano)
■ NL = Dutch (Nederland)
■ PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)
■ CD WE - Western Europe and Arabic:
■ AR = Arabic
■ DN = Danish (Dansk)
■ EN = English
■ FR = French (Français)
■ CD NE - Northern Europe and Russian:
■ EN = English
■ FI = Finnish (Suomi)
■ NO = Norwegian (Norsk)
■ RU = Russian (Russ)
■ SV = Swedish
■ TR = Turkish (Turkçe)
■ CD EE - Eastern Europe:
■ CZ = Czech (Cesky)
■ EL = Greek
■ EN = English
■ HE = Hebrew
1 Purpose and scope
■ HU = Hungarian (Magyar)
■ PL = Polish (Polski)
■ CD AS - Asia:
■ EN = English
■ JA = Japanese
■ KO = Korean
■ TH = Thai
■ ZHCN = Simplified Chinese
■ ZHTW = Traditional Chinese
NOTE Drivers for various languages do not necessarily correspond to geographic countries/ regions. European languages, for instance, are distributed on three CDs.
The following tables show the printing-system components that are supported in each language.
Table 1-4 CD AM - Americas and Europe
Component DE
PS Emulation Driver
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver x
HP PCL 5e Unidriver
PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x
Common Windows Installer
Add Printer Wizard Installer
Customization Utility Wizard
CD Browser x x x x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350
Series Printer User Guide
(PDF)
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350
Series Printer User Guide
(CHM)
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series Printing System Install
Notes x x x x
EN x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ES x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
FR x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
IT x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
NL x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
PT x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Structure and availability of the software CD 17
18
Table 1-4 CD AM - Americas and Europe (continued)
Component DE EN ES x x x HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
HP Toolbox x x x x x x
Table 1-5 CD WE - Western Europe and Arabic
Component
PS Emulation Driver
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
HP PCL 5e Unidriver
PS Emulation Unidriver
Common Windows Installer
Add Printer Wizard Installer
Customization Utility Wizard
CD Browser
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series Printer
User Guide (PDF)
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series Printer
User Guide (CHM)
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series Printing
System Install Notes
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
HP Toolbox x
AR x x x x x x x x x x x x
Table 1-6 CD NE - Northern Europe and Russian
Component EN
PS Emulation Driver
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver x x x
FI x x x
NO x x x
RU x x x x x
FR x x x x x x
DN x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
IT x x x x x x
EN x x x x x x x x x x x x x
SV x x x x x
NL x
TR x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
FR x x x
PT
1 Purpose and scope
Table 1-6 CD NE - Northern Europe and Russian (continued)
Component EN FI NO RU
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
HP PCL 5e Unidriver
PS Emulation Unidriver
Common Windows Installer
Add Printer Wizard Installer
Customization Utility Wizard
CD Browser
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350
Series Printer User Guide
(PDF)
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350
Series Printer User Guide
(CHM)
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series Printing System Install
Notes
HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
HP Toolbox x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Table 1-7 CD EE - Eastern Europe
Component
PS Emulation Driver
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
HP PCL 5e Unidriver
PS Emulation Unidriver
Common Windows Installer
Add Printer Wizard Installer
Customization Utility Wizard
CD Browser
CZ x x x x x x x x x x
EL x x x x x x x x
EN x x x x x x x x x x
HE x x x x x x x x x x x x x
SV x x x x x x x x x x x
HU x x x x x x x x x x x x x
TR x x x x x x x x x x
PL x x x x x x x x x x
Structure and availability of the software CD 19
Table 1-7 CD EE - Eastern Europe (continued)
Component CZ EL
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350
Series Printer User Guide (PDF) x
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350
Series Printer User Guide (CHM) x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide x x HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series
Printing System Install Notes
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
HP ToolHP Toolboxbox x x x x x x x x x x
EN x x x x
HE x x x x x x
HU x x x x x
PL x
20 1 Purpose and scope
Table 1-8 CD AS - Asia
Component EN
PS Emulation Driver
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
HP PCL 5e Unidriver
PS Emulation Unidriver
Common Windows Installer
Add Printer Wizard Installer
Customization Utility Wizard
CD Browser
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350
Series Printer User Guide (PDF) x
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350
Series Printer User Guide (CHM) x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series
Printing System Install Notes x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard x x x x x x x x x x x x x
JA x x
KO x x
TH x x
ZHCN x x
ZHTW x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Web deployment
All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers a notification option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
Printing-system software
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software is available for download from www.hp.com/go/ lj4250_software , or www.hp.com/go/lj4350_software .
The printing-system software supports the following operating systems:
■ Windows 98 and Windows Me
■ Windows XP Professional (32-bit )
■ Windows XP Home Edition
Structure and availability of the software CD 21
22
■ Windows 2000 (32-bit)
■ Windows Server 2003 (32-bit )
NOTE Windows NT 4.0 drivers can be installed only by using the Add Printer wizard.
Standalone drivers
The HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS emulation drivers and unidrivers are available individually to support the following operating systems:
■ Windows 98 and Windows Me
■ Windows NT 4.0
■ Windows 2000
■ Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)
■ Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
■ Mac OS 9.
x
■ Mac OS X (V10.1 or later)
Other operating systems
Drivers and related software are available for these additional operating environments:
■ UNIX
■ Linux
■ OS/2
■ HP Open VMS
Software component availability
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system.
NOTE In the following table, "98/Me" refers to Windows 98 and Windows Me; "2000" refers to Windows 2000; "4.0" refers to Windows NT 4.0; "XP" refers to Windows XP; and "XP 64" refers to 64-bit Windows XP operating systems.
Table 1-9 Software component availability for HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer
Component
Drivers
HP traditional PCL 5e and PCL 6 drivers
HP PCL 5e and PCL 6 unidrivers
PS Emulation Unidriver
98/Me x
4.0
x
2000/XP
x x
XP 64 x x
1 Purpose and scope
Table 1-9 Software component availability for HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer (continued)
Component 98/Me 4.0
PS Emulation Driver
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Installer
Common Windows Installer
Customization Utility Wizard
CD Browser
Add Printer Wizard install
1
Web Registration
This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
XP 64 x
Structure and availability of the software CD 23
24 1 Purpose and scope
2 Software description
Introduction
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and
Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux, and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, see the section that corresponds to that system.
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
Technology background information
Introduction 25
Supported operating systems
The support for Windows operating systems (OSs) offers a full-featured configuration of the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer; support for OSs that are not described in this document offer varying levels of functionality. The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software, including PCL 5e,
PCL 6, and PS emulation drivers, supports the following OSs.
■ Windows 98
■ Windows Me
■ Windows NT 4.0 (Service packs 3 through 6)
■ Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2)
■ Windows XP Home Edition
■ Windows XP Professional (Service pack 1 and greater)
■ Windows Server 2003
NOTE Throughout this manual, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition,
Windows XP Professional, and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing system software also supports the following operating environments:
■ Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X (V10.1 or later)
■ Linux (available at www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting )
■ UNIX (available at www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software )
■ Windows Terminal Server
■ Citrix Terminal Server
■ Windows Cluster Server 8
■ HP OpenVMS (available at h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/ )
■ Tru64 UNIX printing. For further information, go to h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/
■ SAP printing. For further information, go to www.hp.com/go/sap/print
■ OS/2
For more information about the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers, go to www.hp.com/support/lj4250 , or www.hp.com/support/lj4350 .
26 2 Software description
Technology background information
This section contains information about the following topics:
●
●
●
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool
●
●
●
HP Embedded Web Server and HP Toolbox
●
●
●
●
●
●
Printing print-ready documents from a command line
●
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
Driver configuration
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 print drivers feature bidirectional communication technology which, in supported environments, provides automatic discovery and driver configuration for product accessories. Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured are the optional
500-sheet and 1500-sheet paper tray assemblies (Tray 3 and Tray 4), the duplexing unit for automatic two-sided printing, the printer memory, the printer hard disk, and the job-storage feature.
Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the following circumstances:
■ Upon the first installation of a driver, when using Enterprise Autoconfiguration (EAC)
■ When you use the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed
Bidirectional communication
In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the product during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.
Bidirectional communication is the capability of the product to respond to data inquiries from the computer and report back information, such as what type of print media is available or what accessories are connected to the product. If the connection does not have this capability (that is, if it has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information back to the host computer.
Technology background information 27
Bidirectional communication depends on your network operating system and on the type of connection you have between your computer and the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer.
When you install the HP Toolbox, bidirectional communication is always enabled. Installing the
HP Toolbox activates the HP Network Registry Agent (HPNRA) to ensure constant communication between your computer and the printer. When you install a driver without installing the HP Toolbox at the same time, bidirectional communication is enabled only to configure the driver, and is then disabled unless the driver's Update Now feature is used to update the driver.
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on your printing-system software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the product.
Configuration occurs without user interaction. If bidirectional-communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the pre-existing bidirectional-communication software is used to configure the print driver.
If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectionalcommunication software that allows it to communicate with the product and automatically match the print driver with the actual product configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or whenever the Update Now feature is used.
If the configuration of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer changes after installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication by using the Update Now feature. For example, if the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, you can use the Update Now feature to query the product and update the settings to match the product's configuration.
The Update Now feature triggers the driver to recheck the registry for new information. The feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the
Configure tab if you are using an HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5e driver, and on the Device
Settings tab if you are using an HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, or HP PS emulation unidriver.
NOTE If you are using an HP PCL or PS emulation unidriver, you must select Update Now through the Automatic Configuration setting on Device Settings tab in the Properties section of the driver. If you are using an HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5e driver, you must click the Update Now button on the Configure tab in the Properties section of the driver. The
Update Now feature is not available with the PS Emulation Driver.
The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network environments that support bidirectional communication.
Table 2-1 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method Connection type Microsoft Windows
98 Me NT 4.0
2000 XP
Microsoft Share
2000/XP host with
2000/XP client
NT 4.0
host with NT
4.0 client
Installer Direct connect
Parallel
USB
28 2 Software description
Table 2-1 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share (continued)
Method Connection type Microsoft Windows Microsoft Share
98 Me NT 4.0
2000 XP 2000/XP host with
2000/XP client
NT 4.0
host with NT
4.0 client
Network Jetdirect
Standard
TCP/IP x
IPX/SPX x x TCP/IP
(HP)
TCP/IP
(MS) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
IPX/SPX
(HP) x x x x x x x
Add
Printer
Direct connect
Parallel
USB
Network Jetdirect
Standard
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX x x
TCP/IP
(HP) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
1
2
TCP/IP
(MS) x x x x
IPX/SPX
(HP) x x x x x x x
This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 host with
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, or Windows Me client; Windows NT 4.0 host with Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows 2003,
Windows 98, or Windows Me client; and Windows 98 or Windows Me host with any client
In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host.
Table 2-2 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments
Method Connection type Novell
Netware 4.x
Bindery queue
Installer Direct connect Parallel
Network
USB
Jetdirect
Standard
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP (HP)
TCP/IP (MS
x
NDS queue x
Netware 5.x
Bindery queue
NT 4.0
x x
Technology background information 29
Table 2-2 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments (continued)
Method Connection type Novell
Netware 4.x
Netware 5.x
Bindery queue
NDS queue Bindery queue
NT 4.0
1
IPX/SPX (HP)
Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft (MS) Client Service for
NetWare.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP
Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment.
HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations or print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be configured: device settings and printing-preferences settings. The driver is configured to match the product hardware so that gaining access to all of the product accessories through the driver is enabled correctly (for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most driver feature settings can also be configured.
HP Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories installed on the product, or to match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration (.CFG) file (for example, optional trays, total amount of memory, job-storage settings, or mopier settings).
The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps: driver acquisition, driver preconfiguration, and driver installation and deployment. These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending on the tool that is being used to define the configuration.
The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All three are designed with the same basic user interface controls for interacting with the configuration
(.CFG) file, but are packaged differently, either to support established product installation workflows
30 2 Software description
or to leave the deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user. The following tools support driver preconfiguration:
■ HP Driver Configuration Editor . The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small, standalone
Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is associated with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on the target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established process for deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or
HP Print Server Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any ordinary Windows software program is used.
The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available from www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw .
■ The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin . HP Web Jetadmin provides a queuecreation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 server or workstation. The HP Web
Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin adds a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from which the drivers that are being installed for the queues can be customized as part of the process. The plug-in is limited to Internet Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator™ is not supported.
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available from www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/ web_jetadminplugin.html
.
■ HP Customization Utility/Silent Installer . The Customization Utility features an install-time mode of HP Driver Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the drivers for a printing-system software driver installation that uses the silent installer.
Detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools can be found in the HP Driver
Preconfiguration Support Guide , which is available on the printing-system software CD.
Lockable features
The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:
■ Print on Both Sides (Duplex)
■ Media Type
■ Paper Source
When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users.
Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver user interface after it has been installed.
Continuous export
The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings back to the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be transferred when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For instance, if orientation is set to Landscape in an installed version of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for
Windows NT 4.0, then the orientation setting in the newly upgraded HP PCL 6 Unidriver or
HP PCL 5e Unidriver for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 is automatically set to "Landscape."
The continuous export feature functions transparently from the user's perspective and works only between drivers of identical product models.
Technology background information 31
32
NOTE Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the list is always the same for those that can be preconfigured.
The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration.
Table 2-3 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration
Driver Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
N/A
HP Traditional PCL 6
Driver
HP Traditional PCL 5e
Driver
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS Emulation Driver
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
No
N/A
No
N/A
No
N/A
HP PCL 5e Unidriver Yes Yes Yes
1
2
PS Emulation Unidriver N/A N/A N/A
N/A: Not applicable; the driver is not supported in this operating system.
This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Yes
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows XP
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool
NOTE This tool will become available after product release.
The HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool is a Web-based diagnostic software that enables you to determine whether you are using the correct and most current print driver for your
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer. To access the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool, go to http://www.hp.com/go/drivercheck , or go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at http://www.hp.com/go/bsc , select the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar, and then select automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool.
When you run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool, you are presented with a list of products that are currently installed on your computer. Select the HP product that you would like to check and the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool gathers information about your product, drivers, and system setup. The data gathered is used for diagnosing your software driver configuration and for checking your print driver update needs. The tool will then verify whether you are using the latest driver, inform you if you are using an incorrect driver for your HP product, and let you know if there is an updated driver version available for your product. If there is an update available, the tool enables you to download and install the latest driver version by clicking on it.
The data gathered by the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool is stored anonymously for analysis and continuous improvement of HP diagnostic tools. No private data is needed or accessed on your computer.
HP Printer Access Tool
NOTE This tool will become available after product release.
The HP Printer Access Tool is a Web-based program that provides a single point of access to the embedded Web server pages for each networked product in the user's local print folder, making it
2 Software description
easy to remotely manage the products in an unmanaged network environment without affecting performance or reliability. For more information about the HP Embedded Web Server, see the
section of this guide.
To access the HP Printer Access Tool, follow these steps:
NOTE The HP Printer Access Tool must be selected during installation to be available.
1 Select Start .
2 Select Programs .
3 Select HP LaserJet 4250/4350 , and then select HP Printer Access Tool .
4 Click on the appropriate product name to access the EWS pages for that product.
Euro character
The euro is the name for the currency of the European Union (EU). This unit was launched on
January 1, 1999. The euro has changed the way business is conducted in Europe and has affected every company and industry in the world. It is vital that companies understand and prepare for the changes the euro brings.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer includes euro characters for each of the internal fonts. The product can print the euro character in the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. Hewlett-Packard is committed to maximizing document portability through supporting and promoting euro-symbol standards.
HP Embedded Web Server and HP Toolbox
HP embedded Web server (HP EWS) and HP Toolbox are both tools that can be used to remotely configure printers on a network. Both HP EWS and HP Toolbox are used with a Web browser and they have a similar look and feel. Many of the pages in HP EWS are nearly identical to HP Toolbox pages. However, there are several key differences between the two utilities:
■ HP Toolbox is used to manage the printers that are installed on the client machine where
HP Toolbox is installed. HP Toolbox gets the address of the printers from the registry entry of the port that the printer is using.
■ HP Toolbox can also be used to manage locally connected printers.
■ To access HP EWS the user just needs to know the transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address of the printer. No software needs to be installed on the user's computer.
■ For most products, HP EWS can be directly accessed only when both printer and computer are equipped with network cards (or some form of network connection). In these cases the Web browser directly accesses the printer's TCP/IP address. The only Web pages available are those that are served from the printer.
■ HP Toolbox supports network and direct connect forms of printer connectivity. The browser directs itself to a locally hosted TCP/IP service that monitors the printing port (be it network or direct connect). HP Toolbox Web pages are generated through a combination of locally installed
Web content and data that is retrieved from the printer. These Web pages also facilitate printer control. On some products, HP Toolbox provides a link to the printer's HP EWS page, but these
Technology background information 33
34 are not accessed directly through the browser, but rather through the locally hosted TCP/IP service.
■ HP Toolbox provides the Select Device page, which is used to choose which of the locally installed devices to manage (if more than one has been installed).
The HP EWS and HP Toolbox utilities are described in detail in the following sections.
HP EWS
The HP EWS is a standard feature for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer.
The HP EWS provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one product management. In offices that have a limited number of products, remote management of printing devices can be accomplished without installing any management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin. The only requirement is that the management console have a supported Web browser.
In environments with a larger number of products, where one-to-one management is impractical, the
HP EWS and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote product management. Use
HP Web Jetadmin for consolidated management tasks, when you want to perform operations on a selected set of products instead of on individual products. For such environments, HP provides hooks between the HP EWS and HP Web Jetadmin so that you can configure HP EWS features on multiple products in one operation. For example, you can set the security password for the HP EWS simultaneously on a population of products.
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide , go to: www.hp.com/support/lj4250 , or www.hp.com/support/lj4350 .
To view information about the product by using the HP Embedded Web Server, open a supported
Web browser and type in the product transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address or host name. To find the TCP/IP address, look for IP Address on the enhanced input/ output (EIO) Jetdirect page, in the TCP/IP section. To find the host name of the product, look for
Host Name in the TCP/IP section.
You also can view information about an installed HP Jetdirect print server by clicking the Networking tab in the HP Embedded Web Server window.
To print a copy of the EIO Jetdirect page from the control-panel display, follow these steps:
1 Press the S
ELECT
button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION , and then press the S
ELECT
button.
3 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION .
4 Press the S
ELECT
button to print the configuration page.
5 Look in the configuration page section marked "TCP/IP" for the IP address. (The EIO Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration-page printout.)
The HP EWS frame
Each screen in the HP EWS has a frame that contains a top banner, three category tabs, a leftaligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes links to content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and opens options in response to navigation tab selections and menu bar selections.
2 Software description
See the following sections for more information about each tab or area:
■
■
■
Information tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Information tab. To view the information, click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Information tab.
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide .
■ Device Status . This screen provides current status information about the product.
■ Configuration Page . This screen provides information about the configuration of the product.
■ Supplies Status . This screen provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages that have been printed, and the serial number of the product.
■ Event log . This screen provides information about reported printer errors.
■ Usage page . This screen provides a page count for each size of media that has passed through the device, as well as the number of duplexed pages.
■ Device Information . This screen shows device information, such as the product TCP/IP address and serial number.
■ Control Panel . This screen shows the product control panel.
■ Print . You can use this screen to print documents that are print-ready, such as those generated by a "print to file" driver option, .PCL documents, .PS documents, .PDF files, and text (.TXT) files.
Links to off-product solutions
Links on the HP EWS screens provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks.
■ hp instant support . This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your product. Specific status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the "Solve a Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible.
■ Order Supplies . This link connects you to an HP product supplies screen from which you can order genuine HP supplies for your product.
■ Product Support . This link connects to an HP product-support screen from which you can search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for your product.
Technology background information 35
Device Status
Status information, such as whether the product is online or the toner is low, is available through your
Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the product. You can view this information without physically going to the product to identify the status. The following illustration shows how this information is presented on the product Web page.
36
Figure 2-1 Device Status screen on the Information tab
Configuration Page
You can gain access to the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer configuration page remotely through the
HP Embedded Web Server. The HP EWS Configuration Page screen provides configuration information about the product in the same way as the configuration page that is printed from the
2 Software description
product. The following illustration shows an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP EWS.
Figure 2-2 Configuration Page on the Information tab
NOTE This illustration is provided as an example only. The complete screen is not shown.
Technology background information 37
38
Settings tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Settings tab. To view the information, click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Settings tab. The Settings tab is shown in the
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide .
■ Configure Device . Use the Configure Device screen to print product information pages and configure the product remotely.
■ E-mail Server . Use the E-mail Server screen to configure e-mail settings for outgoing alert email messages.
■ Alerts . IT administrators can set up the product to send alerts to anyone through e-mail messages.
■ AutoSend . Use the AutoSend screen to send product configuration and supplies-usage information periodically to your service provider.
■ Security . Use the Security screen to manage security on the product.
■ Edit Other Links . Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the
Web sites of your choice.
■ Device Information . Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the product, assign an asset number, and configure the company name, the person to contact about the product, and the physical location of the product.
■ Language . Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens appear.
■ Date & Time . Use the Date & Time screen to set the correct date and time for the product.
■ Wake Time Use the Wake Time setting to wake the product up at a certain time on a daily basis.
There can only be one wake time setting per day; however, each day can have a different wake time. The sleep mode delay can also be set on this page.
Configure device
You can obtain product configuration information through a Web browser by opening the HP EWS screen and changing any of the basic configuration information on the Settings tab. Security and password controls give management information system managers the level of control that they require within their environments. The following illustration shows an example of product options that can be configured remotely.
2 Software description
Figure 2-3 Settings tab - Configure Device page
Alerts
The product can automatically send e-mail alerts about printing problems or job status to specified email addresses. For example, if toner is low, the product can notify the person who is responsible for ordering or changing the toner. If a product failure occurs, the product can send an e-mail alert directly to the person who is responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured to be sent to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital assistants (PDAs). In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or uniform resource locators (URLs) for expanded notification.
Technology background information 39
40
Figure 2-4 Settings tab - Alerts page
NOTE This illustration is provided as an example only. The complete screen is not shown.
Security
The HP EWS screens that appear, and the settings on them, vary according to how you gain access to the HP EWS: as a general user, an information technology (IT) administrator, or a service provider. To control access to the HP EWS screens, a password can be set on the Security page.
2 Software description
Figure 2-5 Settings tab – Security page
In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in by using the password. If no password has been set (which is the default), all of the tabs are visible.
If a password has been set, you must log on as an IT administrator or a service provider to gain access to the protected HP EWS tabs ( Settings , Digital Sending , and Networking ).
Networking tab
The following options are available on the HP EWS Networking tab.
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide .
Technology background information 41
42
Figure 2-6 Networking tab - Configuration section
The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories: configuration, security, and diagnostics. For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide .
Configuration section
■ Network Settings
■ Other Settings
■ Privacy Settings
■ Select Language
2 Software description
Security section
■ Settings
■ Authorization
■ Mgmt. Protocols
Diagnostics section
■ Network Statistics
■ Protocol Info
■ Configuration Page
Network settings
From the Networking tab, you can enable and configure the following network protocols:
■ TCP/IP
■ Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX)
■ AppleTalk
■ Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC)
■ Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
HP Toolbox
The HP Toolbox is a series of Web pages and a supporting Windows-based software program that provide access to the HP EWS and other firmware functions, making them available on a browserdriven user interface where product properties can be viewed and manipulated.
The HP Toolbox provides links to product status information, help information, and tools for diagnosing and solving problems. The HP Toolbox also provides product status and settings information from the embedded Web server, by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the upperright corner of each of the four tabs.
HP Toolbox requirements
HP Toolbox requires one of these recent Internet browsers in order to show HP EWS pages:
■ Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (Internet Explorer 5.2 or later for Macintosh)
■ Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later (Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later for Macintosh)
■ Opera Software ASA Opera 7.0 for Windows
■ Safari 1.0 software for Macintosh
These browser requirements are not necessarily minimum standards, but they are the minimum tested environments. Other, untested browsers might also provide access to the HP Toolbox screens.
Technology background information 43
44
The HP Toolbox is supported only for Windows 98 and later operating systems (Windows 98,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003). You must have performed a complete software installation in order to use the HP Toolbox.
When the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is connected both through a network using an HP Jetdirect card and through a local parallel or USB connection, the network connection takes precedence. On a network connection, bidirectional communication is supported through a TCP/IP or an IPX/SPX connection. When the product is connected using both a parallel and a USB connection, the parallel connection takes precedence, and the USB connection is disconnected.
Installing HP Toolbox
To install HP Toolbox, perform a custom installation and select hp LaserJet toolbox from the Setup dialog.
NOTE It is necessary to install HP Toolbox for each product, even when HP Toolbox is currently in use for other products.
Uninstalling HP Toolbox
NOTE This feature will become available after product introduction.
You can uninstall HP Toolbox without uninstalling the rest of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 print driver software. To uninstall HP Toolbox, follow these steps:
1 Click Start .
2 Click Programs .
3 Click HP LaserJet 4250/4350 and select Uninstall hp LaserJet Toolbox . The uninstall dialog will appear.
To view the HP Toolbox
To open the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 Toolbox, on the Start menu, point to Programs , point to hp LaserJet 4250 4350 , and then click hp LaserJet toolbox .
The HP Toolbox opens in your Web browser. The HP Toolbox software contains four tabs:
■ Status tab
■ Troubleshooting tab
■ Alerts tab
■ Documentation tab
These tabs are on local browser screens that are installed when you install the printing-system software, and you do not need an Internet service provider to view them.
The HP Toolbox also contains an area with links to the HP Web site. While you do not need to have
Internet access to open and use the HP Toolbox, you must have Internet access in order to gain access to the sites that are associated with the links in the Other Links area.
If your computer is connected to the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer through a network, you can bookmark the URL of the HP Toolbox so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
2 Software description
The HP Toolbox Frame
Each screen in the HP Toolbox has a frame that contains a top banner, three category tabs, a leftaligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes links to the content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and options in response to selections that you make on an HP Toolbox screen.
See the following sections for more information about each tab or area:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Top banner
The top banner has an HP logo. Next to the HP logo, the title of the page appears followed by the product name and a copyright notice. The top banner is the same for all of the HP Toolbox Web pages. The HP logo contains a link to the HP Web site ( www.hp.com
).
Status tab
The Status tab, with the Device Status setting selected, is shown in the following illustration.
Technology background information 45
46
Figure 2-7 HP Toolbox Status tab
The Status tab provides the following options:
■ Device Status . This screen shows the percentage of life remaining for each consumable, the status and configuration information for the input trays and output bins, and the accessories that are installed on the product.
■ Supplies Status . This screen shows the levels remaining for all consumables and the HP part numbers for each consumable. It is helpful to have the part numbers available when it is time to order supplies.
■ Print Info Pages . Print the configuration page and various other information pages that are available for the product, such as the configuration page, the Supplies Status page, and the
Menu Map.
2 Software description
■ toolbox Links . Select a device, view current alerts, or view the HP Toolbox Web site in text-only format (without graphics).
■ Other Links . For information about these links, see
Links to off-product solutions in the
section of this guide.
Troubleshooting tab
The navigation bar on the Troubleshooting tab contains links to the information pages of the product. (Some of these pages are also available from other sources, such as the HP EWS or the product itself.) From the Troubleshooting tab, you can view the following screens:
■ Print Quality Tools
■ Maintenance
■ Error Messages
■ Paper Jams
■ Supported Media
■ Printer Pages
NOTE Netscape users must download a plug-in so that product management features can operate correctly. A link and instructions are provided in the Other Links section. After you click a link, a pop-up window appears that provides information and instructions about how to locate this plug-in.
Technology background information 47
48
Print Quality Tools
The Print Quality Tools screen, shown in the following illustration, provides options for general troubleshooting and Print Quality Troubleshooting Pages.
Figure 2-8 Troubleshooting tab – Print Quality Tools
2 Software description
Maintenance
The Maintenance tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 2-9 Troubleshooting tab – Maintenance page
The Maintenance screen contains information about managing print cartridges.
Technology background information 49
Error Messages
The Control panel message screen, which appears when you click Error Messages , is shown in the following illustration.
50
Figure 2-10 Troubleshooting tab – Error Messages page
Click the Understanding printer messages link to see a list of messages that might appear in the control panel on the product or in the toolbox.
2 Software description
Paper Jams
The Paper jams screen is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 2-11 Troubleshooting tab – Paper Jams page
The Jam locations screen shows the internal paper path and possible jam locations.
Technology background information 51
Supported Media
The Supported Media screen is shown in the following illustration.
52
Figure 2-12 Troubleshooting tab – Supported Media page
The Supported Media screen shows a list of supported paper weights and sizes, explains how to configure trays, and discusses paper handling problems.
2 Software description
Printer Pages
The Printer Pages screen is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 2-13 Troubleshooting tab – Printer Pages
The Printer Pages screen shows a list of useful information pages that the product generates, with a description of the purpose of each page. You can also print the pages directly from this screen.
Technology background information 53
Alerts tab
The Alerts tab is shown in the following illustration.
54
Figure 2-14 Alerts tab
The navigation bar on the Alerts tab contains links to the information pages for the product. Some of these pages are also available from other sources, such as the HP EWS or the product itself. From this section, you can view the following screens:
■ Set up Status Alerts
■ Administrative Settings
The Set up Status Alerts page allows you to turn on or off alert messages, which will notify you when the product has a problem printing.
When any of these alert messages appears on the users's screen, it includes a check box that allows the user to turn off that particular type of alert message. For example, if a supply alert is displayed, the user can check the check box to disable all future supply alerts. If the user later wants to turn these alerts back on, they will need to come to the Alerts tab to do so.
The Administrative Settings screen, which is shown in the following illustration, allows you to change the rate at which the product is checked for alerts.
2 Software description
Figure 2-15 Alerts tab – Administrative Settings page
Technology background information 55
Documentation tab
The Documentation tab is shown in the following illustration.
56
Figure 2-16 Documentation tab – Install Notes page
The navigation bar on the Documentation tab contains links to these information sources:
■ Install Notes.
Contains specific installation instructions and information regarding your product.
■ User Guide.
Contains information about product usage, warranty, specifications, and support.
The HTML format (for Windows-based computers only) allows you to search easily for specific topics and jump between topics.
The User Guide is also available in .PDF file format, which can be printed by page or by chapter, or you can print the entire document. The printed document is formatted as a traditional book.
The User Guide screen is shown in the following illustration.
2 Software description
Figure 2-17 Documentation tab – User Guide page
Linking to the HP EWS
To gain access to the HP EWS, click the Device Settings button in the upper right of any
HP Toolbox screen. You can also open a browser window and type in the HP Jetdirect IP address.
TheHP Toolbox Device Settings option on the Status tab is shown in the following illustration.
Technology background information 57
58
Figure 2-18 Status tab with Device Settings button
When you gain access to the HP EWS from HP Toolbox, a Back to toolbox button becomes available in the screen title bar. You can click this button to return to the HP Toolbox screens.
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide , go to www.hp.com/support/lj4250 , or www.hp.com/support/lj4350
Other Links
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet. These links appear on the left navigational bar throughout the HP Toolbox screens. You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the
HP Toolbox, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the HP Toolbox and reopen it.
2 Software description
HP Instant Support.
This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that you can use to solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your product.
Specific status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the Solve a Problem Web site, which offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible.
Product Registration.
Click this link to connect to a screen where you can register your
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer.
Order Supplies.
Click this link to connect to an ordering screen where you can order genuine HP supplies, such as print cartridges and print media.
Product Support.
This link connects you with an HP product-support screen from which you can search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for your product.
HP Web Jetadmin
Use HP Web Jetadmin and a Web browser to manage HP Jetdirect connected products within your intranet. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a single network-administration server. It can be installed and run on Red Hat Linux; SuSE Linux;
Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation; Windows 2000 Professional, Server, and Advanced
Server; Windows XP Professional, and Windows Server 2003 systems.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
When installed on a host server, any client can use HP Web Jetadmin through a supported Web browser (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape Navigator 7.0).
HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:
■ Task-oriented user interface that provides configurable views for network managers
■ User profiles that can be customized to let network administrators include only the function that is being viewed or used
■ Routing of instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other product problems to different people
■ Remote installation and management from anywhere, using only a standard Web browser
■ Advanced automatic discovery of peripherals on the network without manually typing information about each product into a database
■ Simple integration into enterprise-management packages
■ Capacity to find peripherals based on parameters such as the Internet protocol (IP) address, color capability, and model name
■ Capacity to organize peripherals into logical groups, with an option that provides virtual office maps for easy navigation
■ Capability to manage and configure multiple printers at one time.
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer remote management and status tools by operating system:
Technology background information 59
60
NOTE In the following table, "98/Me" refers to Windows 98 and Windows Me; "2000" refers to Windows 2000; "4.0" refers to Windows NT 4.0; "XP" refers to Windows XP; “XP 64” refers to 64-bit Windows XP; and "Mac" refers to Macintosh operating systems.
Table 2-4 Availability of remote management and status tools
Component
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 plug-in for
Web
Device Storage Manager for Web
Preconfiguration plug-in for Web
98/Me 4.0
x x x x x
2000/XP x x x
XP 64 OS/2 Mac UNIX x x
Linux x
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD provides the following link to download the latest version of the HP Web Jetadmin software: www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin .
Click support on the main screen in the installer CD Browser, and then click hp web jetadmin . The following table shows the supporting operating systems and hardware for HP Web Jetadmin.
Table 2-5 HP Web Jetadmin support
Protocols ■ TCP/IP
■ IPX/SPX
Compatible operating systems ■ Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Windows Server, and Windows Advanced Server
■ Microsoft Windows XP Professional with service pack 1 and Windows Server 2003
■ Microsoft Windows NT Server and Workstation with service pack 3 or later
■ Red Hat Linux 9.0
■ SuSE Linux v. 9.0
Shared print queue creation support
■ Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Server and
Advanced Server
■ Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003
■ Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation
■ HP-UX® 11.0
■ Red Hat Linux 9.0
■ Solaris 7 and 8
■ SuSE Linux 9.0
2 Software description
Table 2-5 HP Web Jetadmin support (continued)
Supported products
Supported browsers
■ Novell NetWare 5.1 and 6.0 (IPX only) that uses
Netware Client 4.9 (or that uses HP Web Jetadmin only on a Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 system)
All HP and non-HP products that are connected through HP
Jetdirect print servers, and standard Management
Information Base-compliant (MIB-compliant) third-party network-connected products
■ Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0, for Windows only
■ Netscape 7.1 (English) for Linux only
Bluetooth
Bluetooth®* wireless technology is a low-power, short-range radio technology that can be used to wirelessly connect computers, printers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), cell phones, and other devices.
* Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license.
Because Bluetooth wireless technology uses radio signals, devices do not have to be in the same room, office, or cubicle and do not require unobstructed line of sight in order to communicate. This wireless technology increases portability and efficiency within business networks.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer can use a Bluetooth adapter (hp bt1300) to incorporate Bluetooth wireless technology. The adapter is available for either USB or parallel connections. The adapter has a 10-meter line-of-site operation range in the 2.5 GHz ISM band and can achieve data transfer rates up to 723 Kbps. The device supports the following Bluetooth profiles:
■ Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP)
■ Serial Port Profile (SPP)
■ Object Push Profile (OPP)
■ Basic Imaging Profile (BIP)
■ Basic Printing Profile (BPP) with XHTML-Print
Remote firmware update
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer features remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest printing-system software and print drivers.
The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps:
1 Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer.
2 Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to your computer.
3 Download the new firmware to the product.
Technology background information 61
62
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration page, follow these instructions.
1 Press the S
ELECT
button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION , and then press the S
ELECT
button.
3 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION .
4 Press the S
ELECT
button to print the configuration page.
5 Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code.
The firmware date code looks something like this: 20031002 07.000.0.
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to www.hp.com/go/ lj4250_firmware , or www.hp.com/go/lj4350_firmware .
The product can receive an .RFU update to the firmware when the product is in a READY state. The product waits for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update.
NOTE If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets, and Web-access alerts.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the product to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the product, such as the number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory that is installed.
If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while
RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again.
If power is lost during the flash dual inline memory module (DIMM) update (while PERFORMING
UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message
RESEND UPGRADE appears (in English only) on the control-panel display. The update must now be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the product.
Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the .RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is processed.
Use one of the following methods to update your product firmware.
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to update the product firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP) through a browser.
2 Software description
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1 Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware
.
2 Open a browser window.
3 In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS> , where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/
IP address of your product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type
FTP://192.168.0.90
4 Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.
5 Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the product uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update your firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system.
Windows operating systems
1 Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware .
NOTE Before connecting to the product, make sure that the product is not in Sleep mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
2 Open a command window on your computer.
3 Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS> . For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp 192.168.0.90
.
4 Press Enter on the keyboard.
5 When prompted for the user name, press Enter .
6 When prompted for the password, press Enter .
7 Type bin at the command prompt.
8 Press Enter . The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window.
9 Type put <FILENAME> , where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\4250FW.RFU
, and then press
Enter .
Technology background information 63
64
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\4250fw.rfu" .
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
● 200 PORT command successful
● 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
● 226 Ready
● 226 Processing Job
● 226 Transfer complete
After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears.
10 The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
11 At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
12 At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface.
Macintosh operating systems
1 Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware
.
2 Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.
3 Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS> For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type FTP 192.168.0.90
4 Press Enter on the keyboard.
5 When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter .
6 Type put <path> , where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the
Web, including the path. For example, type put /username/desktop/4250fw.rfu
, and then press Enter .
2 Software description
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/4250FW.RFU".
To ensure that the entire path to the .RFU file is placed in the put command, type put and a space, and then drag and drop the .RFU file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put command .
7 The download process begins and the firmware is updated. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port
If the product is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the product by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window. At the command prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1 From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2 Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3 At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate product port (such as LPT1). For example, type C:\>copy /b c:\4250fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\4250fw.rfu" lpt1
4 Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages that are described in
Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Technology background information 65
66
5 Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
6 Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .RFU file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
1 At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type C:\>copy /b c:\4250fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\4250fw.rfu" lpt1
2 Press Enter
on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update
appear on the control panel.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
3 At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions.
1 From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME> , where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file
(including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type C:\>copy /b c:\4250fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\4250fw.rfu" \
\your_server\your_computer
2 Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages that are described in
Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. The message
1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .RFU file to the product is acceptable, including the following:
2 Software description
At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel> , where </home/ yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .RFU file.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.
x
only)
For Mac OS 9.
x , a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a put command.
Download and install the program from http://download.com.com/3000-2151-10182446.html
.
Complete the following steps to update the product firmware by using Fetch.
1 Start the program by clicking on the Fetch icon.
2 Type the IP address of the product in the Host: box.
3 Click the Put Files button and browse to the location of the .RFU file.
4 Double-click the file to select it and download it to the product. A confirmation message appears in the main window.
5 Click OK .
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.
x
only)
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the HP LaserJet Utility.
1 Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the .RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product.
The HP LaserJet Utility can be found on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software
CD-ROM that came with the product. If you do not have the CD-ROM, you can obtain the
HP LaserJet Utility by downloading the latest product installer from www.hp.com
.
The firmware file (.RFU file) can be downloaded from www.hp.com/go/lj4250_firmware , or www.hp.com/go/lj4350_firmware .
See
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site for more information.
After you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet Utility, you are ready to begin the update process.
2 Open the HP LaserJet Utility.
3 Click Select Printer and locate the product that you would like to update on the network. Select the product on the right side of the dialog box, and click OK . An information dialog box for the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer appears.
4 On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files . A dialog box appears where you can select a file to be downloaded to the product.
5 Click Select File .
Technology background information 67
68
6 Locate the .RFU file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Click Select . The
Files dialog boxes update to show the .RFU file under File to download .
7 Click Download . The HP LaserJet Utility starts downloading the file to the product. A progress bar shows how much of the file has been downloaded. While the file is downloading, the
RECEIVING UPGRADE message appears on the control-panel display on the product. After the file has downloaded to the product, the PERFORMING UPGRADE message appears on the control-panel display.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command
NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command.
1 From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l <FILENAME> -
OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME> , where <IPADDRESS> can be either the
TCP/IP address or the hostname of the product, and where <FILENAME> is the filename of the .RFU file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2 Press Enter
on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update
appear on the control panel.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
3 Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later on your computer. Complete the following steps to update a single product through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU
file from the HP Web site.
1 Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2 Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the product in the Quick Device Find field, and then click Go . The product Status window opens.
3 Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the Device Lists folder.
4 Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices . Locate the product that you want to update in the list of products, and click to select it.
5 Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select
Update Printer Firmware from the choose action list.
2 Software description
6 If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
7 Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.
8 Refresh the browser.
9 Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
10 Click Update Firmware . HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product. The messages that are described in
Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.
Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations.
1 Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2 Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps: a. Click Device Management , and then click All Devices .
-orb. Shift-click to select products that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK .
-orc. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.
3 To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open .
4 The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if necessary to view it.
5 In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type in the appropriate information. Click Return to Device Group when finished.
Printer messages during the firmware update
Three messages appear during a normal update process.
Table 2-6 Update messages
Printer message
RECEIVING UPGRADE
PERFORMING UPGRADE
INITIALIZING
Explanation
This message appears from the time the product recognizes the beginning of an .RFU
update until the time the product has verified the validity and integrity of the .RFU update.
This message appears while the product is actually reprogramming the firmware.
This message appears from the time the product has finished reprogramming the DIMM until the product reinitializes.
Technology background information 69
70
NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.
Troubleshooting a firmware update
The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.
Table 2-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update
Cause
The job was cancelled from the control panel.
A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example, the parallel cable was removed).
A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE process.
A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING
UPGRADE process.
A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process.
Result
No update has occurred.
No update has occurred.
No update has occurred.
No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel port.
The update has been completed.
Print jobs that are sent to the product while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action that is required for each situation.
Table 2-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Reason for firmware update failure
The .RFU file is corrupted.
The wrong product is contained in the .RFU file.
The upgrade was interrupted.
A flash hardware failure occurred.
Corrective action
The product recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update.
Download the file again and send the new file to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/lj4250_firmware , or www.hp.com/go/lj4350_firmware .
The product recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download the correct file and send it to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/ lj4250_firmware , or www.hp.com/go/lj4350_firmware .
See
Troubleshooting a firmware update .
Although it is extremely unlikely, the product might have a hardware failure. Call technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the product for a local telephone support list).
NOTE All HP LaserJet products leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed. If a remote firmware update fails, the .RFU file must be sent over a parallel port connection.
Printing print-ready documents from a command line
Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line. That is, they do not need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format (such as the Adobe Acrobat or
2 Software description
Acrobat Reader programs for .PDF files), but can be sent directly to the product using a command line.
■ HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (PCL)
■ Portable Document Format (.PDF)
■ Postscript (.PS)
■ Text (.TXT)
Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product.
NOTE The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents.
However, any print-ready file type can be substituted.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files from a command line by using FTP through a browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1 Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware .
2 Open a browser window.
3 In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS> . For example, if the TCP/IP address of your product is 192.168.0.90, type FTP 192.168.0.90
4 Locate the print-ready file for the product.
5 Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol
(FTP) to print a print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system:
Windows operating systems
1 Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware .
2 Open a command window on your computer.
3 Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS> . For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp 192.168.0.90
4 Press Enter on the keyboard.
5 When prompted for the user name, press Enter .
Technology background information 71
72
6 When prompted for the password, press Enter .
7 Type bin at the command prompt.
8 Press Enter . The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window.
9 Type put <FILENAME> , where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\SAMPLE_DOC.PDF
, and then press Enter .
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "C:\MY DOCUMENTS\LJ\SAMPLE_DOC.PDF"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
10 Your print-ready file prints.
Macintosh operating systems
1 Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware .
2 Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.
3 Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS> . For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type FTP 192.168.0.90
4 Press Enter on the keyboard.
5 When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter .
6 Type put <path> , where <path> is the location where the print-ready file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type put /username/desktop/SAMPLE_DOC.PDF
, and then press Enter .
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/SAMPLE_DOC.PDF"
To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put command, type put and a space and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put command.
7 Your print-ready file prints.
2 Software description
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port
To print from the command line by using a local Windows port, follow the instructions in this section for your operating system.
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1 From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2 Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3 At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\> command prompt, type copy / b c:\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf"
4 Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints.
5 At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows 2000
The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
1 At a command prompt, type copy/b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type C:\>copy /b c:\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf
lpt1
2 Press Enter on the keyboard.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf" . The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints.
3 At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Technology background information 73
74
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, complete the following steps.
1 From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME> , where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type C:
\>copy /b c:\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf \\your_server\sharename
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf" \\your_server\sharename
2 Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is acceptable, including the following:
At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel> , where </ home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file.
Print-ready file printing by using Fetch (Mac OS 9
.x
only)
For Mac OS 9 .x
, a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a put command.
Download and install the program from download.com.com/3000-2151-10182446.html
.
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files by using Fetch.
1 Start the program by clicking the Fetch icon.
2 Enter the IP address of the product in the Host: box.
3 Click the Put Files button and browse to the location of the print-ready file.
4 Double-click the file to select it and download it to the product. A confirmation message appears in the main window.
5 Click OK .
2 Software description
File printing by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.
x
only)
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the HP LaserJet Utility.
1 Make sure that you have the tools and files necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the print-ready file that you want to print.
The HP LaserJet Utility can be found on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software
CD that came with the product. If you do not have the CD, you can obtain the HP LaserJet Utility by downloading the latest product installer from www.hp.com
.
After you have the HP LaserJet Utility and you know the location of the print-ready file that you want to print, you are ready to begin the command-line printing process.
2 Open the HP LaserJet Utility.
3 Click Select Printer and locate the product that you would like to upgrade on the network.
4 Select the product on the right side of the dialog box, and click OK . An information dialog box for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer appears.
5 On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files . A dialog box appears where you can select a file to be downloaded to the product.
6 Click Select File .
7 On your hard disk, locate the print-ready file that you want to print, and click the file name to highlight it. Then click Select . The Files dialog box updates showing the .print-ready file that you want to print under File to download .
8 Click Download .
The HP LaserJet Utility starts downloading the file to the product. A progress bar keeps you updated on how much of the file has been downloaded. While the file is downloading, the
PROCESSING JOB message appears on the control-panel display on the product, and the printready file prints.
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
NOTE This command-line printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.
1 Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware .
2 From a command window, type lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME> , where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and where FILENAME is the file name of the printready file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
Technology background information 75
3 The file prints, but no further messages appear in the command prompt window.
4 Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
The following tables detail the software features that are available for each driver type and for each supported operating system that the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports. The printing-system drivers for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0 are the HP Traditional PCL 5e, HP traditional PCL 6, and PS emulation drivers. The printing-system drivers for Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 are the new HP unidrivers, with a user interface look and feel that is consistent across the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver, HP PCL 6, and PS emulation unidrivers.
For more information about the HP traditional HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and PS emulation drivers, see
HP traditional print drivers for Windows . For more information about the HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and PS
emulation unidrivers see HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows .
Job stream output
Table 2-9 Driver support for job stream output feature
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
PCL 6 support
PCL 5e pass-through support
PS 3 emulation
PS 1, 2 emulation x x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x
Windows NT 4.0
x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x
Windows 98, Me x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x
Macintosh x x
Macintosh
Postscript
PJL/PJL encoding
Table 2-10 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding
Operating system Windows NT 4.0
Driver type
Driver
PJL support
7-bit Encoding for PJL
(a-z, A-Z, 0-9)
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
Macintosh
Postscript
76 2 Software description
Table 2-10 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding (continued)
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Driver type
Driver
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
8-bit Encoding for PJL
(chars 32-255)
UTF-8 encoding for
PJL (Unicode to 8-bit) x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Macintosh
Postscript x x x
Job tracking
Table 2-11 Driver support for job tracking
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver Driver type
Driver
PRN file driver identification
Job accounting information
Job accounting enhancements (UUID)
Reliable Time - born on date (PJL DMINFO)
Born on Date (PJL
TIMESTAMP)
Sending user name with every job x x x x x
PCL
6
PCL
5e x x x x x
PS emulation x x x x x
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x x x x x x
Connectivity
Table 2-12 Driver support for connectivity features
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver Driver type
Driver PCL
6
PCL
5e
Parallel (direct connect) x x
PS emulation x
Windows NT 4.0
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
Macintosh
Postscript
Technology background information 77
Table 2-12 Driver support for connectivity features (continued)
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Driver type
Driver
Network - TCP/IP
Network - AppleTalk
PAP
USB (direct connect) via 7.1.2 Port Monitor
(MS USB Print)
USB (direct connect) via 1284.4 Port Monitor
USB (direct connect) via 7.1.2 (Apple USB
Print)
Wireless 802.11
Rendezvous
HP unidriver
PCL
6 x x x
PCL
5e x x x
PS emulation x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x x
PS emulation
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x x
PS emulation x x
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x
Macintosh x x x
Bidirectional communication
Table 2-13 Driver support for bidirectional communication features
Operating System
Driver type
Driver
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Windows NT 4.0
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript
EAC
Status messages x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Parallel (direct connect) x
Network - TCP/IP x
Network - AppleTalk
PAP
USB (direct connect) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Update Now x x x x x x x x
1
Language Monitor
x x x x x x x
MasterMon, a pseudo-language monitor that is used for all HP LaserJet products for the duplex communication channel with bidirectional communication products and to insert PJL commands into the job stream. It loads TCPMON for TCP/IP ports.
78 2 Software description
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Table 2-14 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration
Windows NT 4.0
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver Driver type
Driver
HP Driver
Preconfiguration
Feature lockout x x
Enterprise
Autoconfiguration (EAC) x
Continuous export x
PCL
6
PCL
5e x x x x
PS emulation x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x
Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation
Macintosh
Postscript x
Bundle support
Table 2-15 Bundle support
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Assign bundle support using Installer
Printer bundle in UI
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
Windows NT 4.0
x x
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation
Macintosh
Postscript x x
Macintosh x
Tray and paper assignment
Table 2-16 Tray and paper assignment
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver Driver type
Driver
Assign paper size to tray x
Assign paper type to tray
PCL
6
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
Windows NT 4.0
x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x
Macintosh
Postscript
Technology background information 79
Installable options
Table 2-17 Driver support for installable options
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Duplexing unit
Manual duplex enable
Printer hard disk
Total memory
DWS (available memory)
Additional source trays x
Additional destination bins
Envelope feeder x x
Font DIMM installer
Mopier enabled
Job storage enabled x x x x x x x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Windows NT 4.0
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x x x x x x x x x x
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x x x x x x x x x x
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x x
UI features
Table 2-18 Driver support for UI features
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
UI tabs ("panels" in Mac) x
UI extensions
Page preview images
Printer image bitmaps with hot spots x x
Paper size dimensions x
About . . .
x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x x x
Windows NT 4.0
x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x x x x x x
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x
Macintosh x x
80 2 Software description
Table 2-18 Driver support for UI features (continued)
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Driver type
Driver
Device Settings
Notification
Accessibility/Disability
(JAWS)
Accessibility architecture
HP unidriver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x
Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation
Macintosh
Postscript x
Help features
Table 2-19 Driver support for Help features
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
What's this Help (F1)
Help button
Bubble Help
MS Windows "?" Help
Constraint Help x x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6 x x
PCL
5e x x x x
PS emulation x x x x
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me Macintosh x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
Postscript
Quick Sets
Table 2-20 Driver support for quick sets
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver Driver type
Driver
Print Task Quick Sets x
User Defined Quick Sets x
PCL
6
PCL
5e x x
PS emulation x x
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me Macintosh x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x
Macintosh
Postscript
Technology background information 81
Paper sizes
Table 2-21 Driver support for paper sizes
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Paper Sizes
User Defined Custom
Paper
Edge-to-Edge Laser x x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me Macintosh x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x
Macintosh
Postscript
Media types
Table 2-22 Driver support for media types
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
User Defined Media
Types
Combined Media Types
& Sources in program
(always NO driver UI switch) x x
Combined Media Types
& Sources in program
(optional driver UI switch)
Combined Media Types
& Sources in program
(in driver UI)
Alternative Letterhead
Mode x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh x
82 2 Software description
Job storage
Table 2-23 Driver support for job storage features
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Driver type
Driver PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Proof and hold
Private job
Quick Copy
Stored Job x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Job name
User name x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
PIN
Job storage pop-up x x x x x x x x x x x x x
1
Automatic job and user name x x x x x x x
Job Storage features are available only in Mac OS 9.
x . They are not available for Mac OS X.
x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
x x x x x x x
Macintosh
Postscript x
Print-quality and resolution
Table 2-24 Print-quality and resolution features
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver Driver type
Driver
Print-quality options
Print-quality - custom options recall
Economode
Print optimizations
Halftoning x
Halftoning - Custom
Rendering mode
(automatic)
Send graphics as vector x x x
PCL
6
PCL
5e x x x x x
PS emulation x x x
Windows NT 4.0
x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x
Macintosh x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x
Macintosh
Postscript x x
Technology background information 83
Table 2-24 Print-quality and resolution features (continued)
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Driver type HP unidriver
Driver
Send graphics as raster
Send page as raster
Use HP MEt / Use
More Memory
Manually Print on 2nd
Side / Print on
REt (Laser)
Scale patterns
(WYSIWYG) x
PCL
6
PCL
5e x x
PS emulation x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x x
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x
Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x x
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Macintosh
Postscript x
Reordering options
Table 2-25 Driver support for reordering options
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Page order (reordering for job)
Correct Order for Rear
Bin
Correct Order for
Straight Paper Path
Correct Order for Rear
Output
Correct Order for Front
Output x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x x x
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me x x
Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Macintosh
Postscript x x
84 2 Software description
Resizing options
Table 2-26 Resizing options
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Print Document On
Scale to Fit
Allow Scaling from
Large Paper
% of Normal Size
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6 x x x
PCL
5e x x x x x x
PS emulation x x x
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me x x
Macintosh x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x
Macintosh
Postscript x x
Other document options
Table 2-27 Other document options
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Orientation (Portrait/
Landscape)
Rotate by 180 degrees
Number of copies
Ignore Application
Collation
Collate
Collate - feature in driver UI
Collate through mopy x x x x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x x x x x x x x x
Windows NT 4.0
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh x x x x
Technology background information 85
Watermarks
Table 2-28 Driver support for watermarks feature
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Windows NT 4.0
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Watermarks on/off
First page only
Custom watermark definition
Watermark angle x
Watermark font name
Watermark font color x
Watermark font shading x
Watermark font size x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Watermark font style x x x x x
1
Locally defined watermarks x x x x x
Mac OS 8.5 through 9.x only; not supported by Mac OS X or later.
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
PS emulation
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x x x
Alternative source/paper type
Table 2-29 Driver support for alternate source/paper type feature
Operating system Windows NT 4.0
Driver type
Driver
All pages the same
Front Cover (Blank
Front Cover Inserted)
First Page
Other pages
Last Page
Back Cover - Insert
Blank Back Cover x x x x x x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x x
Macintosh x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x
Macintosh
Postscript x x
86 2 Software description
Table 2-29 Driver support for alternate source/paper type feature (continued)
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Driver type
Driver
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Front Cover form
Feeder (PI Front Cover)
Back Cover form
Feeder (PI Back Cover)
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation
Macintosh
Postscript
Printing destination
Table 2-30 Driver support for printing destination feature
Operating system Windows NT 4.0
Driver type
Driver
Top bin
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation
Macintosh
Postscript x
Finishing options
Table 2-31 Driver support for finishing options
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Auto Duplex / Print on
Both Sides
Manual Duplex
Long Edge / Short
Edge (Flip On)
Smart Duplexing -
Single Page Jobs x
Smart Duplexing - Odd
Page Jobs
Mixed Duplex &
Simplex in Single Job x
Pages per Sheet (N-up) x x x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x x x
Windows NT 4.0
x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh x x
Macintosh
Postscript x
Technology background information 87
Table 2-31 Driver support for finishing options (continued)
Operating system Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Driver type HP unidriver
Driver
Page Borders On/Off
Page Order (N-Up)
Booklet Printing
(Layout using SW)
Booklet Target Size
Staple Options
Fold / Saddle Stitch
Fold Options
Punch Options
Image Shift
Transparency Interleave x x x x x
PCL
6 x x x x x
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x
HP traditional driver x x x
PCL
6
PCL
5e x x x
PS emulation x x x
Windows 98, Me x x
HP traditional driver x x x
PCL
6
PCL
5e x x x
PS emulation x x x
Macintosh x x x
Macintosh
Postscript
Font support
Table 2-32 Font support
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
General device font support
Font substitution
Arabic, Cyrillic,
Hebrew, Greek device
Send TrueType as
Bitmap
TrueType Fonts (UI option)
Print Text as Black x x x
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000, Windows
Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS emulation x x x x x x x x
Windows NT 4.0
x x x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
HP traditional driver
PCL
6 x
PCL
5e x
PS emulation x
Macintosh
Postscript x x
88 2 Software description
Postscript-specific features
Table 2-33 Driver support for postscript-specific features
Operating system
Driver
Postscript memory
Output protocol
Send CTRL-D before each job
Send CTRL-D after each job
Convert gray text to postscript gray
Convert gray graphics to postscript gray
Add euro currency symbol
Job timeout
Wait timeout
Minimum font size to download as outline
Minimum font size to download as bitmap
Printing Preferences
Postscript language level
Send postscript error handler
Mirrored output
Negative output
Output options
Optimize for speed
Optimize for portability
Encapsulated postscript (EPS)
Archive format
Levels of Gray
Fit to Page
TrueType font download option
Outline
Bitmap
Native TrueType x x x x x x x x x
Windows XP
HP unidriver
PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
HP traditional driver Postscript
Postscript PS Emulation x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Technology background information 89
90 2 Software description
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer traditional print drivers. The chapter contains the following sections:
■ HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver features. This section describes the HP PCL 6 and HP HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver drivers for Windows 98, Windows Me, and
Windows NT 4.0.
■ HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver (PS Emulation Driver) features. This section describes the PS Emulation Driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
You can control print jobs from several places: the product control panel, the software program, and the driver user interface. Generally, for features that are common to two or more of these places (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings override product control-panel settings.
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
●
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
Introduction 91
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
When you install the print drivers by using the printing-system installer in Windows 98 or
Windows Me, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed. The HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or the
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP traditional PCL 6and
PCL 5e Document Default print-driver interface, and on some of the tabs of the HP traditional
PCL 6 and PCL 5e Properties print-driver interface.
This section also describes differences between the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver.
Access to print drivers
Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, several different ways are available to gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, click File , click Print , and then click Properties . These driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
Access to print drivers in Windows NT 4.0
In Windows NT 4.0, you can gain access to the Document Defaults...
driver tabs and the
Properties driver tabs. The settings that you make on these driver tabs control the print-job output.
Document Defaults... driver tabs
In Windows NT 4.0, click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers . Right-click the product name, and then click Document Defaults...
to gain access to all of the Document Defaults...
printdriver tabs, which are the same set of driver tabs that the software program controls. These driver settings change the default settings that are used across all software programs.
The following Document Defaults...
print-driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■ Finishing tab
■ Effects tab
■ Paper tab
■ Output tab
■ Job Storage tab
NOTE If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is equipped with a hard-disk drive, all Job
Storage options are available ( Proof and Hold , Private Job , Quick Copy , and Stored
Job ). If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is not equipped with a hard-disk drive, but has a minimum of 80 MB of memory (for the 4250) or 96 MB of memory (for the 4350), the
Proof and Hold and Private Job options are available.
■ Basics tab
The HP driver tabs are indicated by the HP logo appearing in the lower-left corner of the driver tab.
Only HP tabs are documented in this STR.
92 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Properties driver tabs
In Windows NT 4.0, click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers . Right-click the product name, and then click Properties to gain access to all Properties print-driver tabs. The following
Properties driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■ General
■ Ports
■ Scheduling
■ Sharing
■ Security
■ NT Forms
■ Configure
NOTE Only the NT Forms tab and the Configure tab are described in this guide. See the
Properties tabs section in this chapter.
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, click Start , click Settings , and then click Printers . Right-click the product name, and then click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output. The following print-driver tabs are available in
Windows 98 and Windows Me:
■ General
■ Details
■ Color Management
■ Sharing
■ Finishing
■ Effects
■ Paper
■ Output
■ Job Storage
■ Basics
■ Configure
Help system
The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver Driver include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 93
94
What's this? Help
What's this? Help is supported in Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
■ Right-click a control and then click What's this?
. A pop-up Help window appears.
■ Click the ?
button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up
Help window for that feature appears.
■ Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.
Incompatible Options messages
Incompatible Options settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions that you take. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the product or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency , a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict.
Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button
Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK or Cancel button, the interpretation of the button is as follows:
■ Clicking OK accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.
■ Clicking Cancel rejects the change that was just made, and the control returns to its previous value.
Bubble Help
Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in it, representing the international symbol for information. The following illustration shows a Bubble
Help icon on a driver tab.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-2 A property page with a Bubble Help icon
The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable, although it can also accompany an available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help. Moving the pointer over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable. When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution that you should be aware of when using that particular feature.
Finishing tab features
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following illustration shows the Finishing tab.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 95
96
Figure 3-3 The default appearance of the Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ Document Options group box
■ Document preview image
■ Print Quality group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets . Any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Finishing tab affects the Print Task
Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Document Defaults driver tabs (the Effects tab, Paper tab,
Job Storage , Basics tab) because they are all the same control.
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The
Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here . When you change any of the default settings on any of the Document Defaults driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a print task quick set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here , type the name you want for your new print task quick set, and then click Save . The print task quick
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a print task quick set, select it in the drop-down menu and click Delete .
NOTE Administrators can predefine print task quick sets for their users. These administrator print task quick sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define print task quick sets for their own use. Userdefined print task quick sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 print task quick sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
■ Default Print Settings
■ User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings , nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets
Preconfiguration for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values
Driver feature
Print on Both Sides
Flip Pages Up
Booklet Printing
Pages per sheet
Print page borders
Page order
Print Quality
Print document on
Size to print on
Feature setting location
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing
Effects
Effects
tab,
tab,
tab,
Print Quality
Fit to Page
Fit to Page
group box
group box
group box
Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
Off
Unavailable; Off when first activated
Unavailable; Off when first activated
1
Unavailable; Off when first activated
Unavailable; Right then Down when first activated
Faster Printing
Off - print on the size that is specified on the Paper tab
Actual size specified on the Paper tab
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 97
98
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values (continued)
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
Scale to fit
% of Normal Size
Watermarks
First Page Only
Effects
Effects
tab,
tab,
Fit to Page
Fit to Page
group box
group box
Effects tab, Watermarks group box
Effects tab, Watermarks group box
Unavailable; On when first activated
100
(none)
Unavailable; Off when first activated
(none)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Current watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details .)
Watermark message Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details .)
Watermark message angle
Watermark message angle (angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details .)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details .)
(none)
Diagonal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Unavailable unless
Angle option is selected; 52
(degrees) when activated
Arial
Yes
Watermark font name Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Watermark font color Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Watermark font shading
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Watermark font size Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Gray
Very Light
80
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Watermark font style Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Use different paper/ covers
Size is:
Source is:
Type is:
Staple:
Job storage mode
Proof and Hold
Private Job
Paper
Paper
Paper
Paper
tab,
tab,
tab,
tab,
Output
Paper Options
Paper Options
Paper Options
Paper Options
tab,
Bin: Output tab, Output Bin Options group box
Unlabeled group box Job Storage tab
Job Storage
Output Options
tab,
group box
group box
group box
group box
group box
Job Storage Mode
Regular Yes
Off - all of the pages use the same media
No
Letter Yes
Automatically Select Yes
Unspecified
None
Yes
Yes
Automatically Select Yes
Status message about the destination of the job
No
group box Off
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected
No
No
No
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values (continued)
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
Quick Copy
Stored Job
Require PIN to print option
PIN to print
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected
Job Storage tab, PIN group box
Job Storage tab, PIN group box
Unavailable unless
Stored Job is selected; not selected when first activated
Unavailable unless either Private Job is selected, or Stored
Job and Require
PIN to print are selected
Windows user name Job Storage tab, User Name group box
Job name Job Storage tab, Job Name group box
Unavailable unless a Job Storage option has been selected; selected when activated
Unavailable unless a Job Storage option has been selected; selected when activated
No
No
No
No
No
No
Display Job ID when printing
Copy
Portrait
Landscape
Job Storage group box
tab, Job Notification Options
Basics tab, Copies group box
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Unavailable unless a Job Storage option has been selected; selected when first activated
1
On
Off
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Rotate by 180 degrees
Basics tab, Orientation group box Off Yes
1
2
About Basics tab No
Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see
, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj4250 , or www.hp.com/support/lj4350 .
Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series Printer User Guide .
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 99
100
When you select User Guide Print Settings , all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings:
■ Print on Both Sides is set to ON
■ Flip Pages Up is set to ON
■ Pages per Sheet is set to 2
■ Page Order is set to Right then Down
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
■ Correct Order for Rear Bin check box
■ Print on Both Sides check box
■ Flip Pages Up check box
■ Booklet Printing drop-down menu
■ Pages Per Sheet drop-down menu
■ Print Page Borders check box
■ Page Order drop-down menu
Correct Order for Rear Bin
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers have a door in the back that can be opened to allow the paper to go straight out the back of the printer. This bin can be used to minimize curl and avoid jams with heavier paper, such as cardstock. This check box orders the pages correctly for this rear bin so that they come out in the right order. This feature is disabled if automatic duplexing is enabled.
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist:
■ Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any type except Labels , Transparency , or Envelope .
NOTE Print on Both Sides (Manually) is available for Cardstock 164 x 200 g/m 2 .
■ Size is: is set to any size except Envelope #10 , Envelope #DL , Envelope #C5 , Envelope
Monarch or Envelope B5 .
When Paper Size is set to Letter , Legal , or A4 , selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Booklet
Printing option available.
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet when the Print on Both Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 4250dtn, HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl,
HP LaserJet 4350dtn, and HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer models come with a duplexing unit installed.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the product needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the product to use a group of settings, such as fuser temperature and print speed, to produce the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
Manually printing on both sides
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the HP LaserJet 4250, HP LaserJet 4250n, HP LaserJet 4250tn, HP LaserJet 4350,
HP LaserJet 4350n, and HP LaserJet 4350tn printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media.
NOTE To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab in the
Properties print-driver tabs. See Paper Handling Options
in this chapter.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or the HP Traditional HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver Driver. The
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver does not support the manual duplexing feature. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the product automatically duplexes media types that are supported by automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, 8.5 x 13, and
Executive (JIS) only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.
It is important to select the media type that corresponds to the media you are using for the print job.
The following media types have different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
■ Plain
■ Preprinted
■ Letterhead
■ Prepunched
■ Bond
■ Recycled
■ Colored
■ Rough
Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but there is no change to the print mode. Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
1 Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2 Click OK . The even-number pages of the document print.
3 When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 101
102
Figure 3-4 Print on Both Sides Instructions
When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available.
The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the media orientation that is selected on the Basics tab.
Table 3-2 Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab)
Portrait
Landscape
Flip Pages Up selected
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Flip Pages Up not selected
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a note pad.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet Printing
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a supported media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The Booklet
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Printing drop-down menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting is Off . The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the Paper tab.
■ [paper size] (Left Binding)
■ [paper size] (Right Binding)
When you select [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding) , the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If you change the Pages per Sheet
section of this document for more information.
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist:
■ Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected.
■ % of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.
■ Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1.
■ Size is (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4.
If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet
Printing to tell you why it is disabled.
Book and booklet printing
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports both book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages and that can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover , First Page ,
Other Pages , Last Page , or Back Cover settings on the Paper tab (available when you select the
Use Different Paper/Covers check box) to select different printing options for the book.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the
Finishing tab to control booklet settings.
Printing a Booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1 In the software program, click File , click Print , and then click Properties .
2 Click the Finishing tab.
3 Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
4 In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example,
Letter [Left binding] ).
5 Click OK in the print driver.
6 Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 103
104
Figure 3-5 Printing a booklet
Printing a book
You can print a book in which the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover have different media types. For more information, see
Paper tab features of this chapter.
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet drop-down menu provides six settings:
■ 1 page per sheet (this is the default)
■ 2 pages per sheet
■ 4 pages per sheet
■ 6 pages per sheet
■ 9 pages per sheet
■ 16 pages per sheet
When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet , booklet printing is unavailable.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Print Page Borders
Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order , which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
■ Right, then Down
■ Down, then Right
■ Left, then Down
■ Down, then Left
The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following illustration.
Figure 3-6 Page-order preview images
■ 2 pages per sheet
■ 4 pages per sheet
■ 6 pages per sheet
■ 9 pages per sheet
■ 16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Finishing , Effects , Paper ,
Output , and Basics tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image. The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 105
Print Quality group box
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 print driver Print Quality group box provides options that control output settings and font settings.
The default setting for Print Quality is Faster Printing . This is the fastest printing option, but prints with slightly lower quality than the Best Quality option. The Faster Printing setting uses a resolution of 300 dpi for the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver print driver and 600 dpi for the HP Traditional PCL 6
Driver print driver.
Select the Best Quality option to print documents at the optimal resolution for your product. This option provides the best print quality but will print slightly slower than the Faster Printing option.
To use the Custom print quality setting, click the Details button. Clicking the Details button opens the Print Quality Details dialog box. The Print Quality Details dialog box has different options depending on the driver that you are using. After you have made changes in the Print Quality
Details dialog box, the Custom option is selected in the Print Quality group box.
The EconoMode check box can be selected in conjunction with any of the print quality settings.
When you select EconoMode, the product uses less toner on each page. Using this option might extend the life of your print cartridge and can lower the cost per page, but the option also reduces print quality. Using the EconoMode feature with non-HP print cartridges can result in spillage or printer damage.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following illustration.
106
Figure 3-7 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The following options are available:
■ Current Setting group box
■ Output Settings group box
■ Font Settings group box
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box contains a status message indicating which print quality setting is currently in use. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Faster Printing" setting (or This is the “Best Quality” setting ) to This is a "Custom" setting .
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains controls for resolution and pattern scaling, and to print all text as black.
The following are the default values for the Output Settings :
■ Resolution : FastRes 1200 is selected
■ Resolution Enhancement Technology (REt) is On
■ Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) is selected
■ Print all Text as Black is not selected
Resolution
Resolution refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page. As resolution is increased, the quality (clarity and visual appeal) of print on the page is improved. However, higher resolution can also result in longer printing times. The following resolution options are available for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers:
■ ProRes 1200 (180 lpi) : Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 with 180 lines per inch (lpi). This prints slower than other resolutions, but has the best print quality.
■ ProRes 1200 (141 lpi) : Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 with 141 lines per inch (lpi). It prints slower than other resolutions, but has the best print quality.
■ FastRes 1200 : Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 600. It is faster than full 1200 x 1200 resolution, but has a slightly lower print quality.
■ 600 dpi : Prints using standard 600 dpi resolution.
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
REt refines the print quality of characters by smoothing out jagged edges that can occur on the angles and curves of a printed image. It is On by default. Select Off if graphics, particularly scanned images, are not printing clearly.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 107
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is
WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
Print all Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps , which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the product as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver as shown in the following illustration.
108
Figure 3-8 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
The following options are available:
■ Current Setting group box
■ Graphic Settings group box
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
■ Output Settings group box
■ Font Settings group box
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box contains a status message indicating which print quality setting is currently in use. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Best Quality" setting (or This is the “Faster Printing” setting ) to This is a "Custom" setting .
Graphic Settings
The Graphic Settings group box in the HP Traditional HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver Driver has settings for the graphics-rendering mode. The following Rendering Mode: option buttons are available:
■ Automatic . This is the default setting.
■ Send Graphics as Vector . Select this setting to send graphics to the product as a combination of HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2) and raster images. This setting might produce higherquality output.
■ Send Graphics as Raster . Select this setting to send all graphics to the product as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
■ Send Page as Raster . Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the product as images composed of individual dots. Use Send Page as Raster if you are experiencing problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the Send TrueType as Bitmaps option has no effect.
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains controls for resolution, pattern scaling, and to print all text as black.
The default values for the Output Settings are as follows:
■ Resolution : 600 dpi is selected
■ Resolution Enhancement Technology (REt) is On
■ Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) is selected
■ Print all Text as Black is not selected
Resolution
Resolution refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page. As resolution is increased, the quality (clarity and visual appeal) of print on the page is improved. However, higher
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 109
110 resolution may also result in longer printing times. The following resolution options are available in the HP Traditional HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver driver for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers:
■ 300 dpi
■ 600 dpi
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
REt refines the print quality of characters by smoothing out jagged edges that can occur on the angles and curves of a printed image. It is On by default. Select Off if graphics, particularly scanned images, are not printing clearly.
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is
WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
Print all Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps , which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the product as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Effects tab features
The Effects tab is used to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following illustration shows the Effects tab.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-9 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ Fit to Page group box
■ Document preview image
■ Watermarks group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset
(by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Fit To Page
The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls:
■ Print Document on setting
■ Scale to Fit check box
■ % of Normal Size setting
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 111
Print Document On setting
Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
■ % of Normal Size is not 100.
■ Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media source, and any custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to
Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media size.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On option selected, and the target size specified as Letter .
112
Figure 3-10 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100 percent of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the product.
The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10 percent.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the value that you want, and then use the scroll bar arrows to refine the value. Or, type the value into the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size :
■ Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected.
■ Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark.
The Watermarks group box contains the following controls:
■ Watermarks drop-down menu
■ First Page Only check box
■ Edit button (opens the Watermark Details dialog box)
Watermarks drop-down menu
The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
■ (None)
■ Confidential
■ Draft
■ SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image.
First Page Only
When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document.
The First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 113
Edit
Click Edit , and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following illustration shows the
Watermark Details dialog box.
114
Figure 3-11 Watermark Details dialog
The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.
The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls:
■ Current Watermarks
■ Watermark Message
■ Message Angle
■ Document preview image
■ Font Attributes
Current Watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New . The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete .
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble
Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2 ).
When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique.
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in a diagonal, horizontal, or angle (custom) orientation to the text on the page. The default is Diagonal . All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box.
The document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark
Details dialog box.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
■ Name
■ Color
■ Shading
■ Size
■ Style
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 115
116
Color
The Color drop-down menu contains a single setting: Gray .
Shading
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light . The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
■ Lightest
■ Very Light (default)
■ Light
■ Medium Light
■ Medium
■ Medium Dark
■ Dark
■ Very Dark
■ Darkest
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.
Style
The choice of Regular , Bold , Italic , and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu.
The default Style setting for new and current watermarks is Regular .
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, 80 points, and Regular style. The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Very Light shading, and Bold style. The default font name and point size for preset watermarks are language-dependent, and vary.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box.
Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark, and then select a different watermark or click New , all of the changes made to the previous watermark are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
Paper tab features
Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to indicate different paper-selection choices for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper tab.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-12 Paper tab
The Paper tab contains the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ Paper Options group box
■ Document preview image
■ printer image
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
For more information, see
Paper Options
The settings that are specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper Options group box and the selections that are available by default.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 117
118
Figure 3-13 Paper Options group box (default)
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:
■
■
■
■
■
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
NOTE When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When you set the media size in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Lettersize media, any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options must also use Letter-size media.
Because driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is generally best to use the driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document.
For information about media sizes, see the
Media attributes section of this guide.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Use Different Paper/Covers
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the Size is: , Source is: , and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see
.
Source Is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options:
■ Automatically select
■ Manual Feed in Tray 1
■ Envelope Feeder
■ Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
■ Tray 2 (500-sheet tray)
■ Tray 3 (500- or 1500-sheet tray)
■ Tray 4 (500- or 1500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select . When this setting is selected, the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select , make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray. For more information about media sources, see the
Media attributes section of this guide.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified , the product uses the default media type, which is usually Plain .
The following standard types appear in the lists:
■ Unspecified
■ Plain
■ Preprinted
■ Letterhead
■ Transparency
■ Prepunched
■ Labels
■ Bond
■ Recycled
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 119
■ Color
■ Cardstock (164 to 200 g/m 2 or 43 to 53 lb.)
■ Envelope
■ Light (60 to 75 g/m 2 or 16 to 20 lb.)
■ Rough
The default setting is Unspecified , and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is: setting. For more information about media types, see the
section of this guide.
Custom
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab.
The following illustration shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
NOTE The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper/Covers is selected and any setting other than First Page is also selected.
120
Figure 3-14 Custom Paper Size dialog box
When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper tab:
■ If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains the name of that custom size.
■ If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default name Untitled for a custom media size.
NOTE In Windows 98 and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4
inches by 11 inches). In Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP, both uppercase and lowercase names can be used, but they cannot be used to name the same media size.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not against the standard media-size names.
The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and capabilities are discussed in the
section.
Name
The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most recently. Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media sizes, or to type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the following conditions:
■ If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name of the last selected custom media size.
■ If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default name of "Untitled."
■ If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu.
If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click the Save button, you should be able to change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved media-size name is selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning, and replaced by the values of the selected custom media size.
Save, Delete, or Rename
The dynamic command button located under the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels:
Save , Delete , and Rename .
■ Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names. If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you click Yes , the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No , the driver returns to the Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the standard media-size names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default button.
■ Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the drop-down menu or clicking the Save button. Clicking the Delete button causes the saved custom media size to be deleted, after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled , the height and width controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to Save .
■ Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after selecting an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then the name of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name dropdown menu.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 121
122
The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command button, and the actions that take users from one state to another.
Table 3-3 Name drop-down menu text strings
Button label Action Next state State
1
Drop-down menu contents
Untitled Save
2
3
4
<user-typed text>
<name of saved item> Delete
<user-typed text>
Save
Rename
Click Save .
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
Change the width or height values.
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
Click Save .
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
Change the width or height values.
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
Click Delete .
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
Change the width or height values.
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
Click Rename (when the name is unique).
Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate).
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
Change the width or height values.
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
3
4
4
2
3
3
1
4
1
3
3
2
2
3
2
1
Custom size (width and height controls)
The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by using the up and down arrows.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and
height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See Custom width and height control limits
.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending on the current measurement units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the values change.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic measurement-units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric ).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device.
Table 3-4 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (1500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Stacker, Stapler/Stacker
Dimensions
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Minimum Maximum
76.2 mm (3 inches)
127.0 mm (5 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.27 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
210.0 mm (8.27 inches) 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
210.0 mm (8.27 inches) 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Paper and envelope icons
The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.
Dynamic measurement units
Use the dynamic measurement-units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard
(inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic, depending on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters . If the custom size currently shows the measurements in millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches . Click the button to switch measurement-unit types.
Close
The Close button closes the Custom Paper Size dialog box according to the logic in the following table. In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted) while the dialog box is open will remain in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 123
124
Table 3-5 Close dialog box text strings
If the drop-down menu contains And the button says
Untitled Save
<user-typed text>
<name of saved item>
<user-typed text>
Save
Delete
Rename
Then this happens when the Close button is clicked
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the same as it was when the Custom button was clicked.
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the same as it was when the Custom button was clicked.
The dialog box closes, and the current media size is set to the size that was last shown in the drop-down menu.
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the same as it was when the Custom button was clicked.
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with associated options:
■ Front Cover
■ First Page
■ Other Pages
■ Last Page
■ Back Cover
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the size that you selected in the First Page settings and the Size is: driver setting becomes unavailable for all of the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
Therefore, the First Page settings are described first in the following sections.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
First Page
Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. The First Page setting is selected by default.
Figure 3-15 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
■ Size is: drop-down menu
■ Source is: drop-down menu
■ Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is:
in the Type is section of this chapter.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of the document.
The following illustration shows the Front Cover setting and options.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 125
126
Figure 3-16 Front Cover options
The following are the Front Cover options:
■ Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■ Source is: drop-down menu
■ Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Front Cover , you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the
section of this chapter.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First
Page ) for the other pages of the document.
The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following illustration.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-17 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
■ Source is: drop-down menu
■ Type is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is:
in the Type is section of this chapter.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 3-18 Last Page options
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 127
The following are the Last Page options:
■ Source is: drop-down menu
■ Type is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the
section of this chapter.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document.
The following illustration shows the Back Cover setting and options.
128
Figure 3-19 Back Cover setting
The following are the Back Cover options:
■ Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■ Source is: drop-down menu
■ Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Back Cover , you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the
this chapter.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults driver tabs except the Job Storage tab. For more information about the document preview image, see the
Finishing tab features section of this chapter.
Product image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration of the product and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the printer Properties dialog box.
On the Paper tab, the product image contains hot spots where you can select a media source. When you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The current media source tray, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a product image hot spot, is highlighted on the product image. The following points are worth noting:
■ The Automatically Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a corresponding area to highlight in the product image. Selecting other settings in this menu highlights the corresponding part in the product image.
■ Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in the Source is: option. Manual Feed in Tray 1 , which is available from the Source is: drop-down menu, cannot be selected by selecting the image.
■ On the Paper tab, only source trays have product image hot spots and can be highlighted.
Output tab features
The Output tab provides output options for print jobs. The controls that appear on the tab depend on the current physical configuration of the product, either obtained automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually.
NOTE The product image shown in the illustration might differ from your
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer, depending on the model number and the installed accessory devices.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 129
130
Figure 3-20 Output tab
The Output tab can contain the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ Output Options group box
■ Output Bin Options group box
■ Document preview image
■ Product image
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control is to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Output Options
If the stapler/stacker accessory is installed, the Output Options group box appears, containing the
Staple drop-down menu. The options are None or One Staple Angled . Select One Staple Angled to staple the finished print job. When you select the staple option, the page preview image displays where the staple will be placed on the page.
NOTE For some custom paper sizes, the product may assume a specific paper feed orientation (that is, which edge goes into the printer first). If you encounter unexpected results in the staple placement, try using a different feed orientation.
Output Bin Options
The available Output Bin Options depend on which accessory output device is installed on the product. The Bin drop-down menu contains the available output bin options. The options are
Automatically Select (the default), Standard Top Bin , and Stacker Bin (if the stacker or stapler/ stacker accessory is installed).
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults driver tabs except the Job Storage tab. For more information about the document preview image, see the
Finishing tab features section of this chapter.
Product image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Output tab represents the current physical configuration of the product according to the driver configuration data (obtained automatically through bidirectional communication, or configured manually through the driver). It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab. On the Output tab, the product image contains hot spots for selecting an output bin. When the pointer moves over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to the gloved hand used in the Bubble Help, the preview image, and other areas. The current output bin is highlighted in a bright green color on the printer bitmap.
NOTE On the Output tab, only output bins have hot spots and can be highlighted; source trays must be selected from the Paper tab.
Job Storage tab features
Use the Job Storage features to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support jobstorage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features. A minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350) is required to use
Job Storage features.
After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update
Now feature can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the
in this chapter.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 131
132
To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:
1 Click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers .
2 Right-click the product name, click Properties , and then click the Configure tab.
3 Under Other Options , click More...
.
4 If additional memory has been installed, change the setting in the Total Memory: drop-down menu. If you select a minimum of 80 MB of memory (for the 4250) or 96 MB of memory (for the
4350), this also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.
5 If a hard disk has been installed, select the Printer Hard Disk check box in the Storage group box. This also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.
6 Click OK to make the product hard disk and job-storage features available.
NOTE You can disable Job Storage while leaving the product hard disk enabled. To disable
Job Storage, click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers . Right-click the product name, click Properties , click the Configure tab, click More...
, and then click to clear the Job
Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration Options box. When Job Storage is disabled, the Job Storage tab is not visible.
If Job Storage is enabled (without installing a hard disk), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
■ Proof and Hold
■ Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed:
■ Quick Copy
■ Stored Job
Job Storage tab
The following illustration shows the Job Storage tab.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-21 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ Status group box (unlabeled)
■ Job Storage Mode group box
■ PIN group box
■ Job Notification Options group box
■ User Name group box
■ Job Name group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control is to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
For more information, see
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 133
134
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
■ Off
■ Proof and Hold
■ Private Job
■ Quick Copy
■ Stored Job
These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the product control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
When you select Private Job , the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
Using a PIN for Private Job
The Private Job option can be secured by a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). You must type in this number at the product control panel before the product can print the job.
The group box labeled PIN is usually inactive. It becomes active when you select the Private Job option.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to type in more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job .
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
When you select Quick Copy , the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type in a PIN at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel. The private mode is initiated by selecting the Require PIN to Print check box. In this mode, a PIN that is typed at the product control panel is required in order to release the job.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 135
136
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job . If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored job private.
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.
PIN
The PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the PIN group box, PIN to Print , is activated if you select either of the following options:
■ Select Private Job . If selected, you must type in the PIN number at the product control panel in
order to print the job. For more information, see Using a PIN for Private Job .
■ Select Stored Job , and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to
Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. For more information, see the
Job notification
Clicking a job storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the product name, port, and location.
User Name
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name settings:
■ Windows User Name.
This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.
The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name options.
■ Custom.
Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom radio button, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters.
Job Name
Use the text box in the Job Name group box to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. The Automatic option is the default selection. It uses a default job name for the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. If you would like to enter a custom name, select Custom and type the custom job name in the text box. The Job Name text box can contain no more than 16 characters.
If Custom is selected but no job name is specified, as soon as the focus is removed from the control
(that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), the empty string is replaced with
<Automatic> . In those languages for which <Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.
Use the If Job Name Exists drop-down box to choose whether a duplicate job name should have a number appended to it, or whether it should overwrite an existing job with the same name that has already been sent to the printer.
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1 Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
Job Storage features.
2 Click Properties . The Properties dialog box appears.
3 Click the Job Storage tab.
4 Select the Job Storage options (described previously) by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.
5 Click OK .
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel.
1 Press the S
ELECT
button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.
2 Press the S
ELECT
button.
3 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
4 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
PRINT is highlighted.
5 Press the S
ELECT
button.
6 If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press the S
ELECT
button. The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7 Press the up and down buttons to select the number of copies to print.
8 Press the S
ELECT
button to print the job.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 137
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.
1 Press the S
ELECT
button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.
2 Press the S
ELECT
button.
3 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
4 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
5 Press the up and down buttons to select DELETE .
6 If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press the S
ELECT
button. The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7 Press the S
ELECT
button to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
Basics tab features
The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver.
138 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-22 Basics tab
The Basics tab contains the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ Copies group box
■ Orientation group box
■ Document preview image
■ About button
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on all of the Document Default driver tabs (the
Finishing , Effects , Paper , Output , Job Storage , and Basics tabs). The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the
Finishing tab features section of this chapter.
Copies
Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 139
140 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab, invalid entries into the edit box
(such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which media is fed into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait .
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
The Orientation group box contains three options:
■ Portrait.
The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
■ Landscape.
The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
■ Rotate by 180 degrees.
This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180 degrees. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image.
If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults driver tabs except Job Storage . For more information about the document preview image, see
About
When you click the About button on the Basics tab, or you click the HP logo on any of the driver
Properties tabs, the About This Driver dialog box appears. To close the About box, click OK , press Esc , press Alt + F4 , or press Enter . The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog box. The information it contains varies according to driver, date, and version.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-23 About This Driver dialog box
The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information:
■ Printer name
■ Driver name
■ Print driver version number
■ Copyright information
■ Driver Extensions (if any)
■ Configuration Status
The product name, the driver name, the print driver version number, and the copyright information appear at the top of the About This Driver dialog box.
The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions, if any.
The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
Properties tabs
The Properties tabs contain information about and options for configuring the product.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 141
NT Forms tab features
NOTE The NT Forms tab is in the Properties for the print driver.
To gain access to the Properties tabs, click Start on the Window task bar, click Settings , and then click Printers . Right-click the product name, and then click Properties .
The NT Forms tab appears only in the Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 operating environment. The NT
Forms tab (like the Configure tab) can be viewed only from the Properties window. The following illustration shows the NT Forms tab.
142
Figure 3-24 Driver NT Forms tab
Use the NT Forms tab to specify which media sizes and types are loaded in each of the available source trays. This constrains the choices that are available in the Size and Type lists on the Paper tab in the Document Defaults section of the driver.
The NT Forms tab contains a single group box (the Form/Tray Assignments group box) which contains the following controls:
■ Available Trays is a drop-down menu that contains all the trays that are specified on the
Configure tab.
■ This Tray Contains/Size (Forms) drop-down menu contains a list of standard media sizes that the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports, as well as any custom forms that are defined in the
NT Forms tab.
■ This Tray Contains/Type drop-down menu lists all of the media types that the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports.
■ Clear All button removes all the size and type constraints on the Paper tab in the Document
Defaults section of the driver.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Configuring the trays
1 Select the appropriate tray from the Available Trays drop-down menu.
2 Use the This Tray Contains/Size (Forms) drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3 Use the This Tray Contains/Type drop-down menu to select the media type that is configured for the tray.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the remaining trays.
5 Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click the Clear All button to reconfigure all of the trays and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper tab.
Configure tab features
The Configure tab is in the Properties section of the print driver.
To gain access to the Properties tabs, click Start on the Window task bar, click Settings , and then click Printers . Right-click the product name, and then click Properties .
The Configure tab is also available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking
Properties . When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0).
Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the product hardware configuration. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, configure the settings on this tab by clicking the Update Now button. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the
Update Now button is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
When opened from the Printers folder, the Configure tab appears as shown in the following illustration.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 143
144
Figure 3-25 Configure tab
The Configure tab contains the following controls:
■ Printer Model group box
■ Paper Handling Options group box
■ Other Options group box
■ Automatic Configuration group box
■ Product image
Printer Model
In the Printer Model group box, the driver title depends on the printer model being used. Selection of any model in the drop-down menu makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on the tab.
The Printer Model setting automatically changes to User Configured whenever you change any of the device configuration settings on the tab.
The list of models and the changes they produce are described in the table below.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Table 3-6 Printer model bundles
Paper Handling Options
Model Duplexer
HP LaserJet 4250 printer
HP LaserJet 4250n printer
HP LaserJet 4250tn printer
HP LaserJet 4250dt n printer
HP LaserJet 4250dt nsl printer
HP LaserJet 4350n printer
HP LaserJet 4350tn printer
HP LaserJet 4350dt n printer
HP LaserJet 4350dt nsl printer x x x x x x x x x x x x
Mopier
Enabled x x x
Stapler/
Stacker x x x x x x
500-sheet
Input Tray
Other Options (in the More
Configuration Options dialog box)
DWS Total Memory
3.0
6.0
6.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
22.0
22.0
48 MB
64 MB
64 MB
80 MB
80 MB
80 MB
80 MB
96 MB
96 MB
If it is installed and working, the bidirectional mechanism will detect the correct model and update the configuration accordingly, either during installation or when you select Update Now on the
Configure tab. However, the printer model name shown in the Printer Model text box does not change.
Paper Handling Options
The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls:
■ Duplexing Unit check box
■ Allow Manual Duplexing check box
■ Envelope Feeder check box
■ Mopier Enabled check box
■ Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu
Duplexing unit
The HP LaserJet 4250dtn and HP LaserJet 4350dtn, and the HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl and
HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer models are equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing),
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 145
146 which allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for certain media types, including transparencies, labels, envelopes, and cardstock.
NOTE The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.
Envelope Feeder
Select the Envelope Feeder check box if your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is equipped with an optional envelope feeder accessory.
Mopier Enabled
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it on the hard disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the product has an installed hard disk or a minimum total memory of 288 MB, and the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is on.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver performs mopying, which is the ability to send multiple original print jobs to the product. Collating is controlled by using either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled by clearing the Mopier Enabled selection on the Configure tab to disable the feature.
You can control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application
Collation check box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click the
More...
button on the Configure tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the
Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is selected, to allow the software program to control collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled, you must clear the
Ignore Application Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column,
"Expected result," shows how a three-page print job would appear.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Table 3-7 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier Enabled Application collation
Not selected
Not selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Not selected
Selected
Selected
Ignore Application
Collation
Not available
Not available
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Expected result
3 copies uncollated
3 copies collated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies collated by printer
3 copies collated by printer
Optional Paper Sources
The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays. The list of available source trays varies depending on your product , its input accessories, and the product configuration settings on the Configure tab.
For the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper
Sources drop-down menu:
■ (None).
This is the default setting.
■ HP 2x500-sheet & 1500-sheet Trays
■ 3x HP 500-sheet Input Tray
■ HP 500-sheet & 1500-sheet Input Tray
■ 2x HP 500-sheet Input Tray
■ HP 1500-sheet Input Tray
■ HP 500-sheet Input Tray
Other Options
The Other Options group box contains a single More...
command button. Clicking the More...
button opens the More Configuration Options dialog box.
More Configuration Options
When you click the More...
button under Other Options , more configuration options are available.
The More Configuration Options dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 147
148
Figure 3-26 More Configuration Options dialog box
The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls:
■ Storage group box
■ Fonts group box
■ Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box
■ Alternative letterhead mode check box
■ Ignore Application Collation check box
■ Printer Memory group box
■ Include Types in Application Source List check box
Storage
The Storage group box contains the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes. If your product is equipped with a hard disk drive, the Printer Hard Disk check box should be selected and all job storage options are available. If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is not equipped with a hard disk drive but has a minimum of 80 MB of memory (for the 4250) or 96 MB of memory (for the
4350), limited job storage options are available. When job storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the product control panel.
Fonts
The Fonts group box contains a Font Card(s) check box and a corresponding Configure button.
Selecting the Font Card(s) check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed, and that stored data about the fonts on the card is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button is enabled. Click the Configure button to open the Configure Font Card(s) dialog box. If the Font
Card(s) check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box, selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-27 Configure Font Cards dialog box
Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks:
■ Add up to two font cards by clicking the Add button.
■ Specify a unique font-card name.
■ Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards.
■ Select one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list. The list to the right ( Fonts ) shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card(s).
■ Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).
Complete the following steps to configure a font card:
1 Make sure that the font card is installed correctly.
2 Click Add . The Add Font Card dialog box appears.
3 Click Browse . The Font Card Files dialog box appears.
4 Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font card.
5 Click OK .
6 If you want to, you can specify a font card name in the Add Font Card dialog box.
7 Click OK . The selected .PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list. Select the .PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list.
8 Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box. The fonts on the card should now be available on the system.
NOTE When using font cards with the HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers: To install screen fonts that match the font card, use the .HPB file that is specifically designed to work with that card. If no screen fonts exist for the card, use the .PCM file that is specifically designed to work with that card.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 149
150
Allow Scaling from Large Paper
Use the Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box to print from media sizes that are larger than those that the product supports. When this check box is selected, you can select these larger paper sizes from the Size Is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab, and the print jobs are automatically scaled to a size that the product does support.
Alternative letterhead mode
Under normal operation, the product prints duplex jobs with a different orientation than single-sided jobs. This becomes a problem when printing on letterhead, because the user has to switch the orientation of the letterhead media if they need to go back and forth between duplex and single-sided jobs. Alternative letterhead mode solves this problem.
When selected, this option enables you to always load letterhead or pre-printed paper in the same way for all print jobs, whether you are printing duplex or single-sided jobs. To use it, load the paper as you would for a duplex letterhead job. (This is the exact opposite of how you would load the paper for a single-sided letterhead job. See the User Guide for details.) If the printer tray has an icon that indicates to load the paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper the opposite of the orientation shown. When Alternative Letterhead Mode is on, both single-sided and double-sided jobs will print the correct way, without having to change the orientation of the letterhead or pre-printed media.
Ignore Application Collation
This setting overrides collation options that are selected in a software program print options. When
Ignore Application Collation is selected, the print driver collates in the most appropriate way for the print job. The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using.
Printer memory
The Total Memory group box shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the product. The default values for total product memory are based on the product you have installed.
Total product memory is updated through a successful bidirectional query, or can be set manually. In environments where bidirectional communication is unavailable, you can verify that the Total
Memory setting is correct by printing a configuration page. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware .
The Driver Work Space (DWS) value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the product. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance.
The HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers automatically configure the (DWS) value in
Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0 environments that support bidirectional communication. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is available to the product. To manually set the (DWS) value, print a configuration page and find the DWS value in the Memory section of the page. Then, click the More...
button on the Configure tab, and type the
DWS value in the (DWS) field of the More Configuration Options dialog box.
To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware .
Include Types in Application Source List
When the Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected, all media types (such as heavy media and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you are in a software program, you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu, and then clicking Properties .
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Automatic configuration
If you have modified the configuration of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer since installation, click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For more information about the print driver's automatic configuration feature, see the
section of this guide.
If the Update Now button is not available, select the appropriate configuration options on the
Configure tab.
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical configuration of the product according to the driver configuration data. It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab.
NOTE The printer image shown on the Configure tab might differ from your
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer, depending on the installed accessory devices.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features 151
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
When you install the printing-system software in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5c Driver and the PS
Emulation Driver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer install method to install the PS Emulation
Driver.
Depending on the operating system that you are using when you install the print drivers, different methods are available to gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver
Document Default interface and on one of the tabs of the PS Emulation Driver Properties interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for
Windows 98 and Windows Me.
NOTE The information and illustrations in this section reflect the PS Emulation Driver when the computer is running Windows NT 4.0. The PS Emulation Driver looks significantly different for computers that are running Windows 98 and Windows Me.
Access to print drivers
Depending on the operating system that you are installing the print drivers on, there are different ways to gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, click File , click Print , and then click Properties . These driver settings apply only while the software program is open.
Access to print drivers in Windows NT 4.0
In Windows NT 4.0, you can gain access to the Document Default driver tabs and the Properties driver tabs. The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print job output.
You can open the Document Default print drivers directly from the Printers folder. In
Windows NT 4.0, click Start , select Settings , click Printers , right-click the product name, and then click Document Defaults...
to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that the software program controls. These driver settings change the default settings used across all software programs.
The following Document Default print driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■ Page Setup tab
■ Advanced tab
■ Job Storage tab
NOTE If your product is equipped with a hard disk drive, all Job Storage options are available ( Proof and Hold , Private Job , Quick Copy , and Stored Job ). If your
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is not equipped with a hard disk drive, but has a minimum of 80 MB of memory (for the 4250) or 96 MB of memory (for the 4350), the Proof and
Hold and Private Job options are available.
152 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Properties driver tabs
In Windows NT 4.0, click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers . Right-click the product name, and then click Properties to gain access to all Properties print-driver tabs. The following
Properties print-driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■ General
■ Ports
■ Scheduling
■ Sharing
■ Security
■ Device Setting
NOTE Only the Device Setting tab is described in this guide.
Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, click Start , click Settings , and then click Printers . Right-click the product name, and then click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers
A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently install the fonts in the product, postscript fonts are also available from HP in an optional font DIMM. The PS emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when PostScript fonts are purchased from Adobe.
Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print drivers from Adobe with the HP LaserJet PostScript 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe
PostScript print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the
Adobe Web site at www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html
.
See the
section of this guide for a list of the additional fonts.
Help system
The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers, is not available in the PS
Emulation Driver.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 153
What's this Help
In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0, What's this? Help is supported. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
■ Right-click a control and then click What's this?
. A pop-up Help window appears.
■ Click the ?
button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up
Help window for that feature appears.
■ Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.
Page Setup tab features
The Page Setup tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following illustration shows the Page Setup tab.
154
Figure 3-28 Page Setup tab
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The Page Setup tab contains the following controls:
■ Paper Size drop-down menu. Click this to specify the media size (form). The list of available forms matches those that the product supports.
■ Paper Source drop-down menu. Use these settings to select a tray. The default setting is
Automatically Select .
■ Copy Count spin box. Use this box to specify the number of copies.
■ Orientation group box. The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on the page.
■ Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing) group box. The settings in this group box specify whether or not the print job is double-sided. It only appears if the duplexer is installed.
Advanced tab features
The Advanced tab controls the settings for output, graphics, and product features. The following illustration shows the Advanced tab.
Figure 3-29 Advanced tab
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
■ Paper/Output settings (advanced control over the options that are available on the Page Setup tab)
■ Graphic settings (including resolution, scaling, and TrueType font controls)
■ Document Options settings (including product features and postscript options)
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 155
156
Paper/Output
The following Paper/Output settings are available:
■ Paper Size
■ Orientation
■ Paper Source
■ Copy Count
■ Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing)
These settings are also available on the Page Setup tab. For more information, see
Graphic
The following Graphic settings are available:
■ Resolution . Resolution refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page. As resolution is increased, the quality (clarity and visual appeal) of print on the page is improved.
The default setting is 600 dpi .
■ Scaling . Use this setting to reduce or enlarge documents by a specified percentage. When you enlarge a document, only the portion of the document that fits on the page will print. The default setting is 100% .
■ TrueType Font . The default setting is Substitute with Device Font . The other available setting is Download as Softfont . Use this setting when your document has overlapping text and graphics.
Document Options
The following Document Options settings are available:
■ Page Layout (N-up) Option
■ PostScript Options
■ Printer Features
Page Layout Option
The Page Layout (N-up) Option specifies whether the N-up printing feature is enabled. The following settings are available:
■ Normal (One-up) . This is the default setting.
■ Two-up (1x2) . The print job prints two pages per sheet.
■ Four-up (2x2) . The print job prints four pages per sheet.
■ Six-up (2x3) . The print job prints six pages per sheet.
■ Nine-up (3x3) . The print job prints nine pages per sheet.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
■ Sixteen-up (4x4) . The print job prints 16 pages per sheet.
PostScript Options
The following settings for PostScript Options are available:
■ PostScript Output Options offers the following settings:
■ Optimize for Speed . This is the default setting.
■ Optimize for Portability . Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe
Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document will be a selfcontained object. This is useful, for instance, if you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a different product.
■ Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) . Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from a different program.
■ Archive Format . Use this setting to create a PostScript file that you can use later.
■ TrueType Font Download Option offers the following settings:
■ Automatic (default )
■ Outline
■ Bitmap
■ Native TrueType
■ The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use, from 1 to the highest level that your product supports. Some products support multiple levels. It is usually best to select the highest level that is available, because a higher language-level provides more features. In some instances, however, you would still use level 1. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file will be printed by someone who has a level-1 printer, you would need to select level 1. The PostScript Language Level spin box offers settings 1 through 3 .
■ Send PostScript Error Handler specifies whether a PostScript error handler message is sent. If you want the product to print an error page when an error occurs in the print job, click Yes .
■ Mirrored Output specifies mirrored print output. Click Yes to print a mirror image of your document by reversing the horizontal coordinates.
■ Negative Output specifies print output similar to a film negative . Click Yes to print a negative of the image by reversing the values for black and white.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 157
158
Printer Features
The following Printer Features options are available:
■ Output Bin
■ Automatically Select
■ Standard Top Bin
■ Stacker Bin
■ Stapling Options
■ None
■ One Staple Angled (max 15 sheets) Portrait
■ One Staple Angled (max 15 sheets) Landscape
■ Watermark . The following settings are available:
■ None (default)
■ Draft
■ Company Confidential
■ Company Proprietary
■ Company Private
■ Confidential
■ Copy
■ Copyright
■ File Copy
■ Final
■ For Internal Use Only
■ Preliminary
■ Proof
■ Review Copy
■ Sample
■ Top Secret
■ Urgent
■ Custom
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
■ Watermark (Pages per Sheet)
■ 1 (default)
■ >= 2
■ Watermark Font
■ Courier Bold
■ Helvetica Bold (default)
■ Times Bold
■ Watermark Size . Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points. 48 points is the default.
■ Watermark Angle . Settings for the watermark angle range from 90 degrees to -90 degrees in 15degree intervals. A 45-degree angle is the default.
■ Watermark Style
■ Narrow Outline
■ Medium Outline (default)
■ Wide Outline
■ Wide Halo Outline
■ Filled
■ Print Watermark
■ No (default)
■ All Pages
■ First Page Only
■ Collate
■ On (turn off in program)
■ Off (default)
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 159
160
■ Economode
■ False (default)
■ True
■ Fit to Page
■ Prompt User (default)
■ Nearest Size and Scale
■ Nearest Size and Crop
■ Letter
■ A4
Job Storage tab features
Use the Job Storage feature to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support jobstorage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features. A minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350) is required to use
Job Storage features.
After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the product.
Bidirectional communication is not supported in Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows NT 4.0, the operating environments that support the PS Emulation Driver. The driver must therefore be updated manually.
To configure the driver manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:
1 Click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers .
2 Right-click the product name, click Properties , and then click the Device Settings tab.
3 If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options , and then select the option that matches the total amount of memory installed.
4 If a hard disk has been installed, select Printer Hard Disk: under Installable Options , and then select Installed in the Change 'Printer Hard Disk' Setting dialog box that appears.
5 Click OK to make the product hard disk and job-storage features available.
NOTE You can disable Job Storage while leaving the product hard disk enabled. To disable
Job Storage, click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers . Right-click the product name, click Properties , click the Device Settings tab, select Job Storage: , and then select
Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears. When Job Storage is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Job Storage tab
The following illustration shows the Job Storage tab.
Figure 3-30 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
■ Status group box (unlabeled)
■ Job Storage Mode group box
■ Job Identification group box
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel. This feature is intended to provide greater flexibility, convenience, security, and cost savings.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers offer the following Job Storage Mode options:
■ Off
■ Proof and Hold
■ Private Job
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 161
162
■ Quick Copy
■ Stored Job
■ Require PIN to Print (available when Stored Job is selected)
These options and the settings that control them are described below.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-and-hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-andhold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
When you select Private Job , the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second job has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
Using a PIN for Private Job
The Private Job option can be secured by a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). You must type in this number at the product control panel before the product can print the job.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The group box labeled Job Identification is usually inactive. It becomes active when you select the
Private Job option.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to type in more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job .
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
When you select Quick Copy , the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the same user and job names. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type in a PIN at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the Job Identification group box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel. The private mode is initiated by selecting the Require PIN to Print check box. In this mode, a PIN that is typed at the product control panel is required in order to release the job.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job . If you select the Require PIN to Print check box, you must type a PIN to make the stored job private.
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 163
164
Job Identification
The Job Identification group box contains the following controls:
■ User Name text box
■ Job Name text box
■ PIN text box
User Name
Use the User Name text box to help identify the job at the product control panel. The Windows user name automatically appears in the User Name text box. To enter a custom user name, type the custom user name in the text box. The User Name text box can contain no more than 16 characters.
Job Name
Use the Job Name text box to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. This text box uses Untitled as the default job name associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. To enter a custom name, type the custom job name in the text box. The Job Name text box can contain no more than 16 characters.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with UNTITLED . In those languages for which UNTITLED cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.
PIN
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option is activated if you select either of the following options:
■ Select Private Job . If selected, you must type in the PIN number at the product control panel in order to make the job print. For more information, see
■ Select Stored Job , and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to
Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. For more information, see
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1 Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
Job Storage features.
2 Click Properties . The Properties dialog box appears.
3 Click the Job Storage tab.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
4 Select the Job Storage options (described previously) by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.
5 Click OK .
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel.
1 Press the S
ELECT
button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.
2 Press the S
ELECT
button.
3 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
4 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
PRINT is highlighted.
5 Press the S
ELECT
button.
6 If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press the S
ELECT
button. The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7 Press the S
ELECT
button to print the job.
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.
1 Press the S
ELECT
button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.
2 Press the S
ELECT
button.
3 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
4 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
5 Press the up and down buttons to select DELETE .
6 If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press the S
ELECT
button. The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7 Press the S
ELECT
button to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 165
Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab is in the Properties for the print driver in Windows NT 4.0. In Windows 98 and Windows Me, a tab with similar options and settings is called the Device Options tab.
To gain access to the print driver Properties , click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings , and then click Printers . Right-click the product name, and then click Properties .
The Device Settings tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print driver. The Device Settings tab appears when you open the driver from the Printers folder by selecting and right-clicking the printer, and then clicking Properties for the driver. When the driver is opened from within a software program, the Configure tab is not visible.
When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Settings tab appears, as shown in the following illustration.
NOTE The illustration below shows the Device Settings tab in Windows NT 4.0. The appearance of the equivalent tab in Windows 98 follows this illustration.
166
Figure 3-31 Device Settings tab in Windows NT 4.0
The following illustration shows the Device Options tab in Windows 98.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-32 Device Options tab in Windows 98
NOTE Changes that you make to the Device Settings tab are not reflected in the
Document Defaults settings until the modified device settings have been applied. For example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Configure tab, apply the settings, and then re-open Document Defaults .
The Device Settings tab contains the following options:
■ Form to Tray Assignment
■ Font Substitution Table
■ PostScript Configure
■ Installable Options
Form to Tray Assignment
Many products support more than one source of media, such as upper and lower trays. You can assign a form (which defines the media size and margins) to each of your product media sources.
When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print from your software programs. The product prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 167
168
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media-size list on the Advanced tab in the Document Defaults driver tabs. This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting. For example, for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer, trays 3, 4 and 5 are listed in both the
Form to Tray Assignment setting and the Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Page Setup tab.
Font Substitution Table
Clicking this option opens the font substitution table and makes available the options for changing the TrueType-to-PostScript font mapping.
Postscript Configure
The following controls are available in the postscript section of the PS Emulation Driver Device
Settings tab.
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the configuration page. To print a configuration page, follow these steps:
1 Press the S
ELECT
button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
3 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4 Press the S
ELECT
button to print the configuration page.
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available:
■ ASCII (default)
■ TBCP
■ Binary
When you click ASCII , data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
When you click Binary , all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The default setting is No . Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes .
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is Yes . Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change
Yes to No .
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds , the product continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds . You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds .
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds , the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds . You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds .
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type
3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults . The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send
TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in
Document Defaults . The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 169
170
Installable Options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer. The following controls are available:
■ Tray 3
■ Tray 4
■ Tray 5
■ Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
■ Envelope Feeder
■ Printer Hard Disk
■ Mopier Mode
■ Job Storage
■ Accessory Output Bin
■ Printer Memory
Tray 3
This control specifies whether you have Tray 3 , an additional 500-sheet or 1500-sheet media feeder, installed on your product. The default setting is Not Installed . In order to use Tray 3 , you must change this setting to Tray 3 (500-sheet) or Tray 3 (1500-sheet) .
Tray 4
This control specifies whether you have Tray 4 , an additional 500-sheet or 1500-sheet media feeder, installed on your product. The default setting is Not Installed . In order to use Tray 4 , you must change this setting to Tray 4 (500-sheet) or Tray 4 (1500-sheet) .
Tray 5
This control specifies whether you have Tray 5 , an additional 500-sheet or 1500-sheet media feeder, installed on your product. The default setting is Not Installed . In order to use Tray 5 , you must change this setting to Tray 5 (500-sheet) or 1500-sheet Tray .
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
The HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 4250dtn, HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl, HP LaserJet 4350dtn, and
HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer models are equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for certain media types, including transparencies, labels, envelopes, and cardstock.
NOTE The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Envelope Feeder
The two selections for this option are Installed and Not Installed . If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is equipped with an optional envelope feeder accessory the Installed option should be selected.
Printer Hard Disk
When this option is enabled, the Stored Job option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print driver. Use the Stored Job option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel.
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it on the hard disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the product has an installed hard disk or a minimum total memory of 288 MB, and the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled .
Job Storage
If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is equipped with a hard disk drive, the Job Storage option should be enabled and all job storage options are available. If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is not equipped with a hard disk drive but has a minimum of 80 MB of memory (for the 4250) or 96 MB of memory (for the 4350), limited job-storage options are available. When job storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel.
Accessory Output Bin
The options for Accessory Output Bin are Not Installed , HP 500-Sheet Stacker , and HP 500-Sheet
Stapler/Stacker . If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is equipped with one of these accessories, select the appropriate option.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept.
The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.
When a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350) is installed, the Job
Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print driver. The Job Storage option allows you to store print jobs, and then print them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print
(mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 171
172 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer unidrivers. The unidrivers include the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5e Unidriver, and the HP Postscript 3 Emulation
Unidriver (the PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
You can control print jobs from several places: the product control panel, the software program, and the driver user interface. Generally, for features that are common to two or more of these places (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings override product control-panel settings.
Introduction 173
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers in various operating systems, see the
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems section of this guide.
When you install the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default. The HP PCL 5e Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.
The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6, the HP
PCL 5e, and the PS emulation unidriver interface.
The sections also describe differences among the HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and the PS emulation unidrivers.
Access to print drivers
To gain access to driver settings from within most software programs, click File , click Print , and then click Properties . The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These settings apply only while that software program is open.
You can also control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. These settings change the default settings that are used across all software programs. To gain access to the Printers folder, click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP
Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP
Home). Right-click the product name, and then click Printing Preferences to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that the software program controls.
NOTE If your printer is equipped with a hard-disk drive, all Job Storage options are available ( Proof and Hold , Private Job , Quick Copy , and Stored Job ). If your
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is not equipped with a hard-disk drive, but has a minimum of
80 MB of memory (for the 4250) or 96 MB of memory (for the 4350), the Proof and Hold and
Private Job options are available.
If, after right-clicking the product name, you click Properties , you gain access to a different set of tabs that control the driver behavior and driver connections.
Help system
The HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5e Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a fullfeatured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers, is not available in the HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidrivers.
174 4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
What's this? Help
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support "What's this?" Help. You can gain access to "What's this?" Help messages in any of the following ways:
■ Right-click a control and then click What's this?
. A pop-up Help window appears.
■ Click the ?
button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X , to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up
Help window for that feature appears.
■ Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.
Incompatible Print Settings messages
Incompatible print settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions that you take. These messages alert you that the selections are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the product or the current settings of other controls.
NOTE Constraint messages are limited for HP unidrivers. The HP unidrivers accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the product to perform. If you try to print with incompatible settings, the printed documents might have unexpected results because the print driver did not provide feedback that the settings were incompatible. If print jobs do not print as expected, check the printer documentation for the product capabilities.
In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically invalid print-driver configurations result in the appearance of warning messages.
Duplexing, for instance, is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected. The following illustration shows an Incompatible Print Settings message.
Figure 4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message
Clicking the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option button and then clicking OK accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value. If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click I will resolve the conflict myself and then click OK .
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 175
NOTE If you select the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option, the settings that are selected by the driver to resolve the conflict may not correctly reflect the settings you intended to use, and so may have unexpected results. It is best if you try to resolve the conflict yourself.
Advanced tab features
You can use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure special controls that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as media size and copies in the driver (although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the software-program page settings). The following illustration shows the
Advanced tab.
176
Figure 4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
■ Paper/Output settings
■ Graphic settings
■ Document Options settings
Paper/Output
The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls:
■ Copy Count setting
■ Collated check box (appears when you select Copy Count )
Copy Count
This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy count in the software program. Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can enter the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than
1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Collated
The Collated check box appears next to the Copy Count setting. The check box is selected, but is not available. It becomes available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.
When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of each page print together.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software-program Print dialog box.
Settings in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using
Microsoft Word, the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the print driver, the Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program. Similarly, if the Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 177
178
Graphic options
The Graphic section on the Advanced tab contains the True Type Font setting. The options for this setting are Substitute with Device Font and Download as Softfont . Select Substitute with
Device Font (the default) to use equivalent printer fonts for printing documents that contain True
Type fonts. This will permit faster printing; however, you might lose special characters that the printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download True Type fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.
Document Options
The Document Options settings contain the following controls:
■ Advanced Printing Features
■ Print Optimizations
■ Printer Features
■ Layout Options
Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled , metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing tab options such as Page Order , Booklet Layout , and Pages per Sheet are available, depending on your product. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the default ( Enabled ). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the
Advanced tab, the feature is automatically re-enabled.
Print Optimizations
NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 and HP PCL 5e unidrivers. They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled . When this feature is enabled and your document contains overlapping text and graphics, text placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly. If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When disabled, print optimization features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off.
Printer Features
The following Printer Features are available:
■ Print All Text as Black
■ Send True Type as Bitmap (HP PCL 6 and HP PCL 5e unidrivers only)
■ REt
■ Alternative Letterhead Mode
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Print All Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Send TrueType as Bitmap
NOTE The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and HP
PCL 5e unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for those software programs that have trouble using TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting is Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are first converted to bitmap soft fonts before downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.
REt
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) refines the print quality of characters by smoothing out jagged edges that can occur on the angles and curves of a printed image. It is On by default. Select
Off if graphics, particularly scanned images, are not printing clearly.
Alternative Letterhead Mode
Under normal operation, the product prints duplex jobs with a different orientation than single-sided jobs. This becomes a problem when printing on letterhead, because the user has to switch the orientation of the letterhead media if they need to go back and forth between duplex and single-sided jobs. Alternative letterhead mode solves this problem.
When this feature is selected, you can load letterhead or pre-printed paper in the same way for all print jobs, whether you are printing duplex or single-sided jobs. To use it, load the paper as you would for a duplex letterhead job. (This is the exact opposite of how you would load the paper for a single-sided letterhead job. See the User Guide for details.) If the printer tray has an icon that indicates to load the paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper the opposite direction from the orientation that is shown. When Alternative Letterhead Mode is on, both single-sided and double-sided jobs will print the correct way, without having to change the orientation of the letterhead or pre-printed media.
Graphics Mode
NOTE The Graphics Mode option is available only in the HP PCL 5e Unidriver. It is not available in the HP PCL 6 and HP PS emulation unidrivers.
Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings:
■ Send Graphics as Vector . Select this setting to send graphics to the product as a combination of HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2) and raster images. This setting might produce higherqualtiy output.
■ Send Graphics as Raster . Select this setting to send all graphics to the product as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 179
Layout Options
The Layout Options section contains the Page Order setting.
Page Order
Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last. The Back to Front setting is useful if you are printing to a face-up output bin to achieve output in the correct order.
NOTE The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on individual logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be greater than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change.
Paper/Quality tab features
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to indicate different media-selection choices for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper/Quality tab.
180
Figure 4-3 Paper/Quality tab
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ Paper Options group box
■ Document preview image
■ Print Quality group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets . Any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Paper/Quality tab affects most of the Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/Quality , Effects , Finishing , and Job Storage tabs) because they are all the same control.
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced tab, where the setting is not available).
Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
NOTE Administrators can predefine print task quick sets for their users. These administrator print task quick sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define print task quick sets for their own use. Userdefined print task quick sets are described later in this section.
The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
■ Default Print Settings
■ User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings , nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK .
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets
Preconfiguration section for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 181
182
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for U.S. English
Print Task Quick
Sets
Default setting for other languages (if different)
Correct Order for Read Bin
Print on Both
Sides
Flip Pages Up
Finishing group box
Finishing group box
tab,
tab,
Document Options
Document Options
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Booklet Layout Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Print Page
Borders
Page Order
Finishing group box
Finishing group box
tab,
tab,
Document Options
Document Options
Off
Off
Unavailable; Off when activated
Unavailable; Off when activated
1
Unavailable; Off when activated
Unavailable;
Right then
Down when activated
Finishing tab, Orientation group box Portrait
Finishing tab, Orientation group box Off
Orientation
Rotate by 180 degrees
Resizing
Options
Print document on
Size to print on
Effects tab, group box
Effects group box
Effects
tab,
tab, group box
Resizing Options
Resizing Options
Resizing Options
Actual Size
Off - print on the size specified in the Paper/
Quality tab
Actual Size
Scale to Fit
The default value depends on regional media size.
Preconfigurable
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
% of Normal
Size
Watermarks
Watermarks
First Page Only
Current watermarks
Watermark
Message
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Effects tab
Unavailable; On when activated
Off
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details .)
(none)
Effects tab, Watermarks group box Unavailable, Off when activated
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details .)
(none)
(none)
Yes
Yes
Yes
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers (continued)
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for U.S. English
Print Task Quick
Sets
Default setting for other languages (if different)
Watermark
Message Angle
Diagonal Yes
Watermark
Message Angle
(angle)
Watermark
Font Name
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details .)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details .)
Unavailable unless the Angle option is selected; 52
(degrees) when activated
Arial Languagedependent
Yes
Yes
Watermark font color
Watermark
Font Shading
Watermark
Font Size
Watermark
Font Style
Size is:
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box
Gray
Very Light
80
Regular
Letter The default value depends on regional media size.
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Use Different
Paper/Covers
Source is:
Type is:
Print Quality
EconoMode
(might save print cartridges)
Staple:
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box
Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality group box
Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality group box
Off - all of the pages use the same media
Automatically
Select
Unspecified
FastRes 1200
Off
None
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Bin:
Unlabeled group box
Output tab, Output Options group box
Output tab, Output Bin Options group box
Job Storage tab
Automatically
Select
Status message about the
Yes
No
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 183
184
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers (continued)
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for U.S. English
Print Task Quick
Sets
Default setting for other languages (if different)
Preconfigurable
destination of the job
Off is selected Job Storage
Mode
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Proof and Hold Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Private Job
Quick Copy
Stored Job
Windows User
Name
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Job Storage tab, User Name group box
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Unavailable unless a Job
Storage option is selected
No
No
No
No
No
No
Job Name
PIN to Print
Job Storage box
Job Storage group box
tab,
tab,
Job Name group
Require PIN
Unavailable unless a Job
Storage option is selected
Unavailable unless a Job
Storage option is selected
No
No
Display Job ID when printing
Job Storage
Options
tab, Job Notification
group box
Unavailable unless a Job
Storage option is selected
No
1
2
If Job Name
Exists
Job Storage box
tab, Job Name group Unavailable unless a Job
Storage option is selected
No
Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, See
, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj4250 , or www.hp.com/support/lj4350 .
Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series Printer User Guide .
When you select User Guide Print Settings , all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings:
■ Print on Both Sides is set to ON
■ Flip Pages Up is set to ON
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
■ Pages per Sheet is set to 2
■ Page Order is set to Right then Down
Type new Quick Set name here
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here . When you change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a print task quick set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here , type the name you want for your new print task quick set, and then click Save . Print task quick sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a print task quick set, select it from the drop-down menu and click Delete .
NOTE Administrators can predefine print task quick sets for their users. These administrator print task quick sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define print task quick sets for their own use. Userdefined print task quick sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 print task quick sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper Options group box and the selections that are available by default.
Figure 4-4 Paper Options group box
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 185
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. For convenience, in this section the settings in the Paper Options group box are described below in the following order.
■
■
■
■
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Because driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is generally best to use the driver to set media size only when you are printing from software programs that lack a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document.
For information about media sizes, see the
Media attributes section of this guide.
Custom
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper/
Quality tab. The following illustration shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
186
Figure 4-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Name
Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name text box is one of three things, depending on the following conditions:
■ If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name of the selected custom media size.
■ If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default name of "Custom."
■ If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is saved or the dialog box is closed.
If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click the Save button, you should be able to change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking the Save button, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.
Paper Size
The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the
Paper Size group box.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry.
Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of the control is two decimal places for both millimeters and inches.
Units
To change measurement units, select one of the radio buttons in the Units group box (either Inches or Millimeters ).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device.
Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Dimensions
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Minimum
76.2 mm (3 inches)
127.0 mm (5 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.27 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
Maximum
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 187
188
Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes (continued)
Tray Dimensions
Tray 4 (1500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Stacker, Stapler/Stacker
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Minimum Maximum
210.0 mm (8.27 inches) 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
210.0 mm (8.27 inches) 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Use Different Paper/Covers
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the Size is: , Source is: , and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see the
Use Different Paper/Covers section in this chapter of the guide.
Source Is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options:
■ Automatically select
■ Printer Auto Select
■ Manual Feed in Tray 1
■ Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
■ Tray 2 (500-sheet or 1500-sheet tray)
■ Tray 3 (500-sheet or 1500-sheet tray)
■ Tray 4 (500-sheet or 1500-sheet tray)
■ Tray 5 (500-sheet or 1500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select . When this setting is selected, the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select , make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray. For information about media sources, see the
section of this guide.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all the media types that the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified , the printer uses the default media type, which is usually Plain .
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
The following standard types appear in the lists:
■ Unspecified
■ Plain
■ Preprinted
■ Letterhead
■ Transparency
■ Prepunched
■ Labels
■ Bond
■ Recycled
■ Color
■ Cardstock (164 to 200 g/m 2 or 43 to 53 lb)
■ Envelope
■ Light (60 to 75 g/m 2 )
■ Rough
The default setting is Unspecified , and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure the correct media type is loaded in the tray you selected in the Source is: setting.
For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this guide.
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books with different media types using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with the associated options:
■ Front Cover
■ First Page
■ Other Pages
■ Last Page
■ Back Cover
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 189
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of the document.
The following illustration shows the Front Cover setting and options.
190
Figure 4-6 Front Cover options
The following are the Front Cover options:
■ Size is: drop-down menu
■ Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■ Source is: drop-down menu
■ Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes that you make to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings that you made in other Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you select Front Cover , you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the
this chapter.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.
First Page
Use the First Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 4-7 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
■ Size is: drop-down menu
■ Source is: drop-down menu
■ Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes that you make to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings that you made in other Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is:
in the Type is section of this chapter.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 191
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the other pages of the document.
The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
192
Figure 4-8 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
■ Size is: drop-down menu
■ Source is: drop-down menu
■ Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes that you make to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings that you made in other Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is:
in the Type is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 4-9 Last Page options
The following are the Last Page options:
■ Size is: drop-down menu
■ Source is: drop-down menu
■ Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes that you make to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings that you made in other Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is:
in the Type is section of this chapter.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 193
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to include a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.
The following illustration shows the Back Cover setting and options.
194
Figure 4-10 Back Cover setting
The following are the Back Cover options:
■ Size is: drop-down menu
■ Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■ Source is: drop-down menu
■ Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes that you make to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings that you made in other Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you select Back Cover , you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the
this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality , Effects , Finishing , and Output tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image.
Print Quality
The Print Quality group box contains the Print Quality drop-down box and the EconoMode check box.
The default setting for Print Quality is FastRes 1200 for the PCL 6 print driver or 600 dpi for the HP
PCL 5e and PS emulation print drivers.
This setting controls resolution, which refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page. As resolution is increased, the quality (clarity and visual appeal) of print on the page is improved. However, higher resolution may also result in longer printing times. The following options are available in the Print Quality drop-down box:
■ ProRes 1200 (180 lpi) : Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 with 180 lines per inch (lpi). This prints slower than other resolutions, but has the best print quality.
■ ProRes 1200 (141 lpi) : Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 with 141 lines per inch (lpi). It prints slower than other resolutions, but has the best print quality.
■ FastRes 1200 : Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 600. It is faster than full 1200 x 1200 resolution, but has a slightly lower print quality.
■ 600 dpi : Prints using standard 600 dpi resolution.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 195
The EconoMode check box can be selected in conjunction with any of the print quality settings.
When you select EconoMode, the product uses less toner on each page. Using this option might extend the life of your print cartridge and can lower the cost per page, but the option also reduces print quality. Using the EconoMode feature with non-HP print cartridges can result in spillage or product damage.
Effects tab features
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following illustration shows the Effects tab.
196
Figure 4-11 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ Resizing Options group box
■ Document preview image
■ Watermarks group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the
Quality tab features section of this guide.
Resizing Options
The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls:
■ Actual Size (default)
■ Print Document On setting
■ Scale to Fit check box
■ % of Normal Size setting
Actual Size
Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.
Print Document On
Select the Print Document On radio button to format the document for one media size and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
■ The % of Normal Size value is not 100.
■ The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media source and any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media size.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit check box specifies whether each formatted document-page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print
Document On check box selected, and the target size specified as Letter .
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 197
198
Figure 4-12 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100 percent of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10 percent.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the desired value, and then use the scroll bar arrows to refine the value.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size :
■ Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected
■ Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of most Printing Preferences driver tabs
(the Paper/Quality , Effects , Finishing and Output tabs).
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the document preview image.
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to choose a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
■ (none)
■ Confidential
■ Draft
■ SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is
"(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Click Edit , and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.
Figure 4-13 Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 199
200
Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However, clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark, and then select a different watermark or click New , all of the changes made to the previous watermark are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
Current Watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New . The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it. The name that you type in the Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark
Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete . A warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size.
When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example,
Draft #2 ). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique ( Draft #3 , Draft #4 , and so on).
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the page. The settings are Diagonal , Horizontal , or Angle (custom). The default is Diagonal . All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page. Horizontal places the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page. Angle places the text at the specified angle across the page.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls.
■ Name drop-down menu
■ Color drop-down menu
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
■ Shading drop-down menu
■ Size spin box
■ Style drop-down menu
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent.
Color
The Color drop-down menu contains a single setting: Gray .
Shading
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light . The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu.
■ Lightest
■ Very Light (default)
■ Light
■ Medium Light
■ Medium
■ Medium Dark
■ Dark
■ Very Dark
■ Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. A choice of Light produces a lightly saturated gray watermark. A choice of Lightest produces the lightest shade of watermark; Darkest produces a black watermark.
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent.
Style
The choice of Regular , Bold , Italic , and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu.
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular .
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, 80 points, and Regular style. The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Very Light shading, and Bold style. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent, and varies.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 201
Finishing tab features
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following illustration shows the Finishing tab.
202
Figure 4-14 Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ Document Options group box
■ Document preview image
■ Orientation group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the
Quality tab features section of this guide.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
■ Correct Order for Rear Bin check box
■ Print on Both Sides check box
■ Flip Pages Up check box
■ Booklet Layout drop-down menu
■ Pages per Sheet drop-down menu
■ Print Page Borders check box
■ Page Order drop-down menu
Correct Order for Rear Bin
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers have a door in the back that can be opened to allow the paper to go straight out the back of the printer. This bin can be used to minimize curl and avoid jams with heavier paper, such as cardstock. This check box orders the pages correctly for this rear bin so that they come out in the right order.
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). The Print on Both Sides check box is always available, but selecting Print on Both Sides with the following media types or sizes will cause the driver to display an Incompatible Print Settings message when the print job is sent:
■ Media types: Labels , Transparency , or Envelope .
■ Media sizes: Envelope #10 , Envelope B5 , Envelope C5 , Envelope DL , or Envelope Monarch .
When the Print on Both Sides option is selected, a small warning icon will appear next to these media types and sizes in the drop-down menus on the Paper/Quality tab, indicating the incompatibility.
Selecting Print on Both Sides also makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Layout options available.
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet when the Print on Both Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP LaserJet 4250dtn, HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl, HP LaserJet 4350dtn, and HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer models come with a duplexing unit installed.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by not sending one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been enabled in the driver.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 203
204
All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides, such as labels and transparencies, and the following media types:
■ Prepunched
■ Preprinted
■ Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified , the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
Manually printing on both sides
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the HP LaserJet 4250, HP LaserJet 4250tn, HP LaserJet 4350, and HP LaserJet 4350tn printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as transparency.
NOTE To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, enable the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the
Properties print driver tabs. You might also need to disable duplexing by selecting Disabled on the Device Settings tab. See
Installable Options in this chapter.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP PCL 6,
PCL 5e, or the PS emulation unidriver. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the printer automatically duplexes media types that are supported by automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, 8.5 x 13, and Executive (JIS) only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.
It is important to select the media type that corresponds to the media you are using for the print job.
The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
■ Plain
■ Preprinted
■ Letterhead
■ Prepunched
■ Bond
■ Recycled
■ Colored
■ Rough
Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
1 Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2 Click OK . The even-number pages of the document print.
3 When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.
Figure 4-15 Print on Both Sides Instructions
When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box, enabled only when Print on Both Sides is selected, is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not selected. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the media orientation selected on the Finishing tab.
Table 4-3 Page orientation
Orientation (Finishing tab)
Portrait
Landscape
Flip Pages Up selected
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Flip Pages Up not selected
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 205
206 side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a note pad.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet Layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu is Off . The following options are available in the Booklet Layout drop-down menu.
■ Left Edge Binding
■ Right Edge Binding
When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding , the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet . If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to
4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the Printing a booklet
section of this chapter for more information.
Book and booklet printing
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover , First Page , Other
Pages , Last Page , and Back Cover settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select the Use Different Paper check box) to select different media for the front cover, first page, other pages, and back cover.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings.
Printing a booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1 Click File , click Print , and then click Properties .
2 Click the Finishing tab and select the Print on Both Sides check box.
3 In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for example, Right Edge Binding ).
4 Click OK in the print driver.
5 Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Printing a book
You can print a book in which the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover have different media types. For more information, see
Paper/Quality tab features of this chapter.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet drop-down menu provides six settings:
■ 1 page per sheet (this is the default)
■ 2 pages per sheet
■ 4 pages per sheet
■ 6 pages per sheet
■ 9 pages per sheet
■ 16 pages per sheet
NOTE When you select an option other than 2 pages per sheet , booklet printing is unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page
Order , which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
■ Right, then Down
■ Down, then Right
■ Left, then Down
■ Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following illustration.
Figure 4-16 Page-order preview images
■ 2 pages per sheet
■ 4 pages per sheet
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 207
208
■ 6 pages per sheet
■ 9 pages per sheet
■ 16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of most Printing Preferences driver tabs
(the Paper/Quality , Effects , Finishing , and Output tabs).
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the document preview image.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which media is fed into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait .
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
The Orientation group box contains three options:
■ Portrait.
The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
■ Landscape.
The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
■ Rotate by 180 degrees.
This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180 degrees. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
NOTE You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.
Output tab features
The Output tab provides output options for print jobs. The controls that appear on the tab depend on the current physical configuration of the product, either obtained automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Figure 4-17 Output tab
The Output tab can contain the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ Output Options group box
■ Document preview image
■ Output Bin Options group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control is to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 209
210
Output Options
If the stapler/stacker accessory is installed, the Output Options group box appears, containing the
Staple drop-down menu. The options are None or One Staple Angled . Select One Staple Angled to staple the finished print job. When you select the staple option, the page preview image displays where the staple will be placed on the page.
NOTE For some custom paper sizes, the printer may assume a specific paper feed orientation (that is, which edge goes into the printer first). If you encounter unexpected results in the staple placement, try using a different feed orientation.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of most Printing Preferences driver tabs
(the Paper/Quality , Effects , Finishing , and Output tabs).
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the document preview image.
Output Bin Options
The available Output Bin Options depend on which accessory output device is installed on the product. The Bin drop-down menu contains the available output bin options. The options are
Automatically Select (the default), Standard Top Bin , and Stacker Bin (if the stacker or stapler/ stacker accessory is installed).
Job Storage tab features
Use the Job Storage features to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support jobstorage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features. A minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350) is required to use
Job Storage features.
After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update
Now feature can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the Automatic
in this chapter.
To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:
1 Click Settings , and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP
Professional) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
2 Right-click the product name, click Properties , and then click the Device Settings tab.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
3 If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options , and then select the new total amount of memory installed.
4 If a hard disk has been installed, select Printer Hard Disk: under Installable Options , and then select Installed in the drop-down menu.
5 Click OK to make the product hard disk and job-storage features available.
NOTE You can disable Job Storage while leaving the product hard disk enabled. To disable
Job Storage, click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other
Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). Right-click the product name, click Properties , click the Device Settings tab, select Job Storage: , and then select Disabled in the Change 'Job
Storage' Setting dialog box that appears. When Job Storage is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible.
Job Storage tab
The following illustration shows the Job Storage tab.
Figure 4-18 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
■ Print Task Quick Sets group box
■ status group box (unlabeled)
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 211
212
■ Job Storage Mode group box
■ Require PIN group box
■ Job Notification Options group box
■ User Name group box
■ Job Name group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the
Quality tab features section of this guide.
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel. This feature is intended to provide greater flexibility, convenience, security, and cost savings.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
■ Off
■ Proof and Hold
■ Private Job
■ Quick Copy
■ Stored Job
These options and the settings that control them are described below.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
When you select Private Job , the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the Require PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
Using a PIN for Private Job
The Private Job option can be secured by a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). You must type in this number at the product control panel before the product can print the job.
The group box labeled Require PIN is usually inactive. It becomes active when you select the
Private Job option.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to type in more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job .
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
When you select Quick Copy , the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 213
214
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350).
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type in a PIN at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the Require PIN group box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel. The private mode is initiated by selecting the PIN to Print check box. In this mode, a PIN that is typed at the product control panel is required in order to release the job.
The group box labeled Require PIN is usually inactive. The PIN to Print check box becomes available when you select Stored Job . If you select the PIN to Print check box, you must type a PIN to make the stored job private.
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.
Require PIN
The Require PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the group box, PIN to Print , is activated if you select either of the following options:
■ Select Private Job . If selected, you must type in the PIN number at the product control panel in order to make the job print. For more information, see
■ Select Stored Job , and then select the PIN to Print check box. If the PIN to Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. For more information, see
.
Job notification
Clicking a job storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the product name, port, and location.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
User Name
Selecting a job storage option causes the User Name group box to become available. Use the User
Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name settings:
■ Windows User Name.
This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.
The Windows user name is automatically displayed in the User Name text field.
■ Custom.
Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom option button, the text field below the option becomes available. The text field can contain no more than 16 characters.
Job Name
Selecting a job storage option causes the Job Name group box to become available. Use the Job
Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the control panel. The following are the Job
Name settings:
■ Automatic . This option automatically generates the job name associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name.
■ Custom . Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the Custom option button, the text field below the option becomes available.
■ If Job Name Exists . Use this drop-down menu to choose whether a duplicate job name should have a number appended to it, or whether it should overwrite the existing job with the same name.
The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters.
If Custom is selected, but no job name is specified, as soon as the focus is removed from the control
(that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), the empty string is replaced with
<Automatic> . In those languages for which <Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1 Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without Job
Storage features.
2 Click Properties . The Properties dialog box appears.
3 Click the Job Storage tab.
4 Select the Job Storage options (described previously) by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.
5 Click OK .
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 215
216
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print by using the product control panel.
1 Press the S
ELECT
button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.
2 Press the S
ELECT
button.
3 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
4 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
PRINT is highlighted.
5 Press the S
ELECT
button.
6 If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press the S
ELECT
button. The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7 Press the S
ELECT
button to print the job.
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.
1 Press the S
ELECT
button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.
2 Press the S
ELECT
button.
3 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
4 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the S
ELECT
button.
5 Press the up and down buttons to select DELETE .
6 If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press the S
ELECT
button. The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7 Press the S
ELECT
button to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
Services tab features
The Services tab provides access to supply status information.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Figure 4-19 Services tab
Click the Device and Supplies status icon on the Services tab to open the Device Status page of the HP EWS. This page shows the current status of the product, the percentage of life remaining for each supply, and supply ordering information.
Access to the Device Status page is available for any product that is connected to the network. For more information about the HP EWS, see the
section of this guide.
NOTE This feature is only available for network-connected printers.
Properties tabs
The Properties tabs contain information about and options for configuring the product.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 217
Device Settings
NOTE The Device Settings tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to the print driver Properties , click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings , and then click
Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
Right-click the product name, and then click Properties .
Available options depend on the feature. The following illustration shows the Device Settings tab.
218
Figure 4-20 Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab contains the following controls for media-handling devices and for managing the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer.
■ Form to Tray Assignment options
■ Font Substitution Table
■ External Fonts option
■ Postscript options (for the HP PS Emulation Unidriver only)
■ Installable Options options
Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports more than one source of media. You can assign a form
(which defines the media size and margins) to each of your printer media sources. When a form is
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The product prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs.
This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting. For example, for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer, trays 3, 4, and 5 are listed in both the
Form to Tray Assignment setting and the Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Configuring the trays
1 Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.
2 Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.
4 Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click the Cancel button to reconfigure all of the trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab.
Font Substitution Table
Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the product.
External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Expanding the Font Substitution Table option causes a list of fonts to appear, as show in the following illustration. Use the settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 219
Figure 4-21 Font Substitution Table
External Fonts
NOTE The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL 5e unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Clicking the External Fonts option causes the Properties button to appear. Clicking the Properties button opens the Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following illustration.
220
Figure 4-22 HP Font Installer dialog box
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Installing external fonts
Follow these steps to install external fonts.
1 Click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes
(Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware
Devices (Windows XP Home).
2 Right-click the name of the product, and then click Properties .
3 Click the Device Settings tab.
4 Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
5 Click the Properties button. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.
6 Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or click
Browse to locate the file on your computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be
Added window.
7 Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add . The fonts are installed and the file names appear in the Installed Font(s) window.
8 Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
Removing external fonts
1 Click Start , select Settings , and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes
(Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware
Devices (Windows XP Home).
2 Right-click the name of the product, and then click Properties .
3 Click the Device Settings tab.
4 Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
5 Click the Properties button. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.
6 The external fonts that are installed appear in the Installed Fonts window. Select the fonts that you want to remove, and then click Remove . The fonts are removed.
7 Click OK to close the Font Installer dialog box.
Postscript options
On the PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab you will see some additional postscript configuration options. These are shown in the following illustration.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 221
222
Figure 4-23 Device Settings tab for thePS Emulation Unidriver
The postscript configuration options are described in the following sections.
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the configuration page. To print a configuration page from the control panel, press the Select button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. Next, press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION , and then press the S
ELECT
button. Next, press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT
CONFIGURATION , and then press the S
ELECT
button.
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available:
■ ASCII (default)
■ TBCP
■ Binary
When you click ASCII , data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
When you click Binary , all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The default setting is No . Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes .
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is Yes . Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change
Yes to No .
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in text to the gray that the postscript driver provides. It is set to No by default.
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in graphics to the gray that the postscript driver provides. It is set to No by default.
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
This control specifies whether to augment the device fonts with the Euro currency character. It is set to Yes by default.
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds , the product continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds . You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds .
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds , the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds . You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds .
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 223
224
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type
3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults . The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send
TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in
Document Defaults . The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Installable Options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer. The following controls are available:
■ Automatic Configuration
■ Envelope Feeder
■ Tray 3
■ Tray 4
■ Tray 5
■ Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
■ Allow Manual Duplexing
■ Accessory Output Bin
■ Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
■ Printer Hard Disk
■ Job Storage
■ Mopier Mode
■ Printer Memory
Automatic Configuration
Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the
Update Now under Automatic Configuration . The default setting is Off . After an automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.
If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Envelope Feeder
The two selections for this option are Installed and Not Installed . If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is equipped with an optional envelope feeder accessory the Installed option should be selected.
Tray 3
This control specifies whether you have Tray 3 , an additional 500-sheet or 1500-sheet media feeder, installed on your product. The default setting is Not Installed . In order to use Tray 3 , you must change this setting to 500-Sheet Tray or 1500-Sheet Tray .
Tray 4
This control specifies whether you have Tray 4 , an additional 500-sheet or 1500-sheet media feeder, installed on your product. The default setting is Not Installed . In order to use Tray 4 , you must change this setting to 500-Sheet Tray or 1500-Sheet Tray .
Tray 5
This control specifies whether you have Tray 5 , an additional 500-sheet or 1500-sheet media feeder, installed on your product. The default setting is Not Installed . In order to use Tray 5 , you must change this setting to 500-Sheet Tray or 1500-Sheet Tray .
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
The HP LaserJet 4250dtn, HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl, HP LaserJet 4350dtn, and HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer models come with a duplex unit installed. This setting is enabled by default.
NOTE The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Some printer models do not support automatic 2-sided printing. However, you can print on both sides of a page using manual 2-sided printing when this option is enabled. This option is enabled by default.
Accessory Output Bin
The options for Accessory Output Bin are Not Installed , HP 500-Sheet Stacker , and HP 500-Sheet
Stapler/Stacker . If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is equipped with one of these accessories, select the appropriate option.
Postscript Passthrough
Postscript Passthrough is only available in the PS Emulation Unidriver. It is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript Passthrough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a Postscript driver.
Options such as Watermarks, N-up, and booklet printing might not print correctly from some programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send Postscript information to the printer that the driver cannot control. Other programs might print while using these options without problems.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 225
226
Select Disabled and print your document again if you encounter problems.
NOTE In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough may cause unexpected program behavior.
Printer Hard Disk
When this option is enabled, the Stored Job option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print driver. Use the Stored Job option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel.
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
Job Storage
If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is equipped with a hard-disk drive, the Job Storage option should be enabled and all job storage options are available. If your HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is not equipped with a hard disk drive but has a minimum of 80 MB of memory (for the 4250) or 96 MB of memory (for the 4350), limited job-storage options are available. When job storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel.
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the printer once, and then storing it in the printer hard disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the product has an installed hard disk or a minimum total memory of 48 MB, and the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled .
When you use the HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, or PS emulation unidriver, mopying is performed in one of two ways: either through the software or through the product hardware. When the mopier is enabled, mopying takes place through the product hardware by default. One copy of a multiple-page print job is transmitted once through the network to the product, together with a printer job language (PJL) command that directs the product to make the specified number of copies.
When you disable the mopier, you are not necessarily disabling mopying, which the driver can still perform through the software rather than through the product hardware (the mopying path that is disabled when you change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled ). However, a multiple-copy print job that you send with the mopier disabled loses the advantage of transmitting the print job once, because the print job is sent through the network the same number of times as the number of copies selected.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver performs mopying, which is the ability to send original print jobs to the product. Collating is controlled by either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device
Settings tab to Disabled .
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
You can control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on the Advanced tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count option is set to more than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column,
"Expected result," shows how a three-page print job would appear.
Table 4-4 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier mode
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Application collation
Not selected
Not selected
Selected
Selected
Not selected
Not selected
Selected
Selected
Driver collation
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Expected result
3 copies uncollated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies collated
3 copies collated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies collated
3 copies collated
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept.
The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.
When a minimum total memory of 80 MB (for the 4250) or 96 MB (for the 4350) is installed, the Job
Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print driver. The Job Storage option allows you to store print jobs, and then print them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print
(mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
About tab
NOTE To gain access to the print driver Properties, click Start on your Window task bar, click Settings , and then click Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (for
Windows XP and Windows Server 2003). Right-click the printer name, and then click
Properties .
The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about each of the components.
The information varies according to the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer model number, driver, date, and versions. The About tab is shown in the following illustration.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features 227
Figure 4-24 About tab
The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
228 4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
5 Installing the Windows printingsystem components
The information that follows discusses these topics:
●
Supported Windows operating systems
●
●
●
229
Supported Windows operating systems
The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software supports the following Windows operating systems:
■ Windows 98
■ Windows Me
■ Windows NT 4.0 (parallel and networked only)
■ Windows 2000 (32-bit)
■ Windows XP Home Edition (32-bit)
■ Windows XP Professional (32-bit and 64-bit)
■ Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows OS, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print
driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using the Add Printer feature
.
NOTE The HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer has not been tested with and does not support the Windows 3.1
x or Windows 95 operating systems.
230 5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Windows System requirements
The following are the system requirements for installing and using the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software on each of the supported operating systems:
■ Pentium® or compatible processor
■ Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640-by-480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA])
■ Same amount of RAM as the minimum requirements for the operating system
■ 93 MB of available hard-disk space (on the same partition as the operating system) for full installation
■ Onboard parallel port or network connection
Windows System requirements 231
Font support
The following sections list the fonts that are included with Microsoft Windows software, and the fonts that are available on the CD that came with the product.
Basic fonts
Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing product:
■ Arial
■ Times New Roman Italic
■ Arial Italic
■ Times New Roman Bold
■ Arial Bold
■ Courier New Bold Italic
■ Times New Roman Bold Italic
■ Arial Bold Italic
■ Symbol
■ Wingdings
■ Courier New
■ Times New Roman
Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a typical installation of the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software.
Table 5-1 Default fonts
File name
ALBR85W.TTF
ALBR55W.TTF
OLVR55W.TTF
OLVR75W.TTF
OLVR56W.TTF
CGOR45W.TTF
CGOR65W.TTF
CGOR66W.TTF
CGOR46W.TTF
Font name
Albertus Extra Bold
Albertus Medium
Antique Olive
Antique Olive Bold
Antique Olive Italic
CG Omega
CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Bold Italic
CG Omega Italic
232 5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Font support
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
File name Font name
CGTR45W.TTF
CGTR65W.TTF
CGTR66W.TTF
CGTR46W.TTF
CLAR67W.TTF
CORONET.TTF
CPSR45W.TTF
CPSR65W.TTF
CPSR66W.TTF
CPSR46W.TTF
GARR45W.TTF
GARR65W.TTF
GARR46W.TTF
GARR66W.TTF
HELR45W.TTF
HELR65W.TTF
HELR66W.TTF
HELR47W.TTF
HELR67W.TTF
HELR68W.TTF
HELR48W.TTF
HELR46W.TTF
AVGR45W.TTF
AVGR46W.TTF
AVGR65W.TTF
AVGR66W.TTF
BOKR75W.TTF
BOKR76W.TTF
BOKR35W.TTF
BOKR36W.TTF
CHANC___.TTF
DINGS___.TTF
LETR45W.TTF
LETR65W.TTF
CG Times
CG Times Bold
CG Times Bold Italic
CG Times Italic
Clarendon Condensed Bold
Coronet
CourierPS
CourierPS Bold
CourierPS Bold Oblique
CourierPS Oblique
Garamond
Garamond Bold
Garamond Italic
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
Helvetica
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Helvetica Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
ITC Bookman Demi
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Light Italic
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
ITC Zapf Dingbats
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Bold
233
234
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
File name Font name
LETR46W.TTF
MARIGOLD.TTF
NCSR75W.TTF
NCSR76W.TTF
NCSR56W.TTF
NCSR55W.TTF
PALR65W.TTF
PALR66W.TTF
PALR46W.TTF
PALR45W.TTF
SYMPS__.TTF
TIMR65W.TTF
TIMR66W.TTF
TIMR46W.TTF
TIMR45W.TTF
UNVR65W.TTF
UNVR66W.TTF
UNVR67W.TTF
UNVR68W.TTF
UNVR57W.TTF
UNVR58W.TTF
UNVR55W.TTF
UNVR56W.TTF
Letter Gothic Italic
Marigold
New Century Schoolbook Bold
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
New Century Schoolbook Italic
New Century Schoolbook Roman
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
Palatino Italic
Palatino Roman
SymbolPS
Times* Bold
Times Bold Italic
Times Italic
Times Roman
Univers Bold
Univers Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Medium
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
Univers Medium
Univers Medium Italic
Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD.
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts
File name
PS_12639.TTF
PS_12640.TTF
PS_14530.TTF
PS-11120.TTF
PS_11119.TTF
PS_11118.TTF
Font name
Albertus MT
Albertus MT Italic
Albertus MT Light
Antique Olive CompactPS
Antique Olive Roman
Antique Olive Roman Bold
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Font support
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
File name Font name
PS_11846.TTF
PS_24516.TTF
PS_12704.TTF
PS_14508.TTF
PS_12581.TTF
PS_12585.TTF
PS_12586.TTF
PS_12582.TTF
PS_24517.TTF
PS_24518.TTF
PS_14513.TTF
PS_10269.TTF
PS_12968.TTF
PS_10369.TTF
PS_10370.TTF
PS_14514.TTF
PS_14515.TTF
PS_10249.TTF
PS_10267.TTF
PS_10268.TTF
PS_14512.TTF
PS_14511.TTF
PS_24509.TTF
PS_13872.TTF
PS_13874.TTF
PS_13875.TTF
PS_14053.TTF
PS_14054.TTF
PS_14051.TTF
PS_13873.TTF
PS_13870.TTF
PS_13871.TTF
PS_12542.TTF
PS_12544.TTF
Antique Olive Roman Italic
Apple Chancery Italic
Bodoni Poster
Bodoni PosterCompressed
BodoniPS
BodoniPS Bold
BodoniPS Bold Italic
BodoniPS Italic
Candid
Chicago
Clarendon Light
ClarendonPS
ClarendonPS Bold
Cooper Black
Cooper Black Italic
Copperplate32bc
Copperplate33bc
Coronet
Eurostile
Eurostile Bold
Eurostile Bold ExtendedTwo
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
Geneva
GillSans
GillSans Bold
GillSans Bold Italic
GillSans Condensed
GillSans Condensed Bold
GillSans ExtraBold
GillSans Italic
GillSans Light
GillSans Light Italic
Goudy
Goudy Bold
235
236
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
File name Font name
PS_10695.TTF
PS_12545.TTF
PS_12543.TTF
PS_14526.TTF
PS_14528.TTF
PS_14529.TTF
PS_14527.TTF
PS_24519.TTF
PS_24521.TTF
PS_24522.TTF
PS_24520.TTF
PS_24523.TTF
PS_14503.TTF
PS_14505.TTF
PS_14506.TTF
PS_14504.TTF
PS_13778.TTF
PS_13777.TTF
PS_13779.TTF
PS_13780.TTF
PS_12675.TTF
PS_12677.TTF
PS_12625.TTF
PS_12623.TTF
PS_94073.TTF
PS_14525.TTF
PS_24524.TTF
PS_24510.TTF
PS_12506.TTF
PS_12510.TTF
PS_12511.TTF
PS_12507.TTF
PS_14072.TTF
PS_11546.TTF
Goudy Bold Italic
Goudy ExtraBold
Goudy Italic
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Condensed Bold
Helvetica Condensed Bold Italic
Helvetica Condensed Italic
Hoefler Text
Hoefler Text Black
Hoefler Text Black Italic
Hoefler Text Italic
Hoefler Text Ornaments
Joanna MT
Joanna MT Bold
Joanna MT Bold Italic
Joanna MT Italic
Letter Gothic Italic
Letter GothicPS
Letter GothicPS Bold
Letter GothicPS Bold Italic
Lubalin Graph
Lubalin Graph Bold
Lubalin Graph Bold Italic
Lubalin Graph Italic
Marigold
Mona Lisa Recut
Monaco
New York
Optima
Optima Bold
Optima Bold Italic
Optima Italic
Oxford Italic
Stempel Garamond Roman Italic
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Font support
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
File name Font name
PS_11545.TTF
PS_11547.TTF
PS_11548.TTF
PS_14507.TTF
PS_13501.TTF
PS_14023.TTF
PS_14024.TTF
PS_13502.TTF
PS_14030.TTF
PS_14040.TTF
PS_14021.TTF
PS_14022.TTF
PS_14029.TTF
PS_14039.TTF
PS_13548.TTF
PS_13547.TTF
PS_14481.TTF
PS_14480.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
StempelGaramond Roman Bold
StempelGaramond Roman Bold Italic
Taffy
Univers 45 Light
Univers 45 Light Bold
Univers 45 Light Bold Italic
Univers 45 Light Italic
Univers 47 Condensed Light Bold
Univers 47 Condensed Light Bold Italic
Univers 55
Univers 55 Italic
Univers 57 Condensed
Univers 57 Condensed Italic
Univers Extended Italic
Univers ExtendedPS
Univers ExtendedPS Bold Italic
Univers ExtendedPS Italic
237
Installation instructions
The following sections provide instructions for installing the print drivers on various Windows operating systems.
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems
General installation instructions are similar for theWindows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and
Windows XP operating systems.
NOTE For the Windows NT 4.0 operating system, the print drivers can be installed only by using the Add Printer installation method. These print drivers, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver, and the PS Emulation Driver are available on the printingsystem software CD. For more information, see the
Installing print drivers by using the Add
section in this chapter.
NOTE The HP PCL 5 drivers also can only be installed using the Add Printer installation method. The are included on the printing-system software CD, but are not included in the printing-system installer.
If the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer is connected through a file or print server, the printing-system software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP
LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication, some driver autoconfiguration methods, and the HP Toolbox are not available to the client systems.
For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are necessary in order to install the software.
When the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added to the system.
Installing from the printing-system software CD
Follow these instructions to install the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing system from the CD that came with your product.
1 Close all programs that are open on your computer.
2 Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If your CD does not start automatically, click Start , click Run , and then browse to and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.
3 Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts.
238 5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printingsystem files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the printing-system software file.
1 Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.
2 Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
3 Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the product is installed. For detailed installation instructions, see
Detailed Windows installation .
Detailed Windows installation
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments. You can choose to install the software by using a typical installation, a minimum installation, or a custom installation.
Using the Back and Cancel buttons
Clicking the Back button on any installation dialog box returns you to the previous dialog box. The specific dialog box depends on your previous selections.
To exit the installation sequence without installing the product, click the Cancel button in any installation dialog box.
1 Clicking the Cancel button opens a dialog box, prompting you with this question: “Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?”
2 Clicking Yes opens a dialog box, stating that the setup was interrupted.
3 Clicking the Finish button opens the Cancel dialog box.
4 Clicking the Finish button closes the installation screens.
Other buttons appear on the installation dialog boxes:
■ Help
■ Next
■ Space
The result of clicking these buttons is explained in context below.
Modifying a pre-existing installation
If an HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer has been installed previously on your system, the appearance of the main install screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install printer setting changes to modify installation. A pre-existing installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are presented, depending on selections made.
Installation instructions 239
Typical installation dialog box sequence
NOTE The dialog boxes shown in this chapter appear in the Windows XP Pro installation sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems.
The typical installation includes the following components:
■ HP LaserJet 4250/4350 PCL 6 driver
■ Screen fonts
■ HP LaserJet 4250/4350 series Printing System Install Notes
■ HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series Printer User Guide
The following illustration represents an overall path through the installation process. It is intended as a reference only; selections and setups will vary.
240 5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-1 Installation path
NOTE The components of a typical installation might vary from product to product.
When you select the install printer option from the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer software CD, the
Choose Setup Language dialog box appears, as shown in the following illustration.
Installation instructions 241
Figure 5-2 Choose Setup Language dialog box
NOTE The Choose Setup Language dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software CD.
The installer automatically detects the language that your computer system uses and presents this selection as the default.
You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the dropdown menu.
Clicking OK initiates the printing system setup, and the Preparing to Install dialog box appears.
NOTE While the Preparing to Install dialog box appears, the installer is decompressing files into the system TEMP directory. The elapsed time to complete this action depends upon the performance of your system.
Clicking Cancel at this point takes you to a Setup Error dialog box. Clicking the Finish button on this dialog box closes the installation screens. This sequence of screens differs from that seen when you click the Cancel button in subsequent dialog boxes, but the result is the same; the installation sequence is canceled.
242
Figure 5-3 Preparing to Install dialog box
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
NOTE If your computer uses the Windows NT 4.0 operating system, you must use the Add
Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional
PCL 5e Driver, and the PS Emulation Driver for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printers. If you try using the regular install method in a Windows NT 4.0 operating environment, the following screen appears.
Figure 5-4 Use the Add Printer Wizard
For information about using the Add Printer install method, see the
Installing print drivers by using the Add Printer feature section.
Figure 5-5 Welcome dialog box
Clicking Software License Agreement takes you to the HP Software License Agreement dialog box.
Clicking Installation Notes opens the file LJ4X50_INSTALL_NOTE_ENWW.HTM
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Connection dialog box.
Installation instructions 243
Figure 5-6 HP Software License Agreement dialog box
Clicking OK returns you to the Welcome dialog box.
244
Figure 5-7 Printer Connection dialog box
NOTE The product does not support infrared connections.
If you select Connected directly to this computer (a direct connection that uses a parallel cable or
USB cable), clicking Next takes you to the Connector Type dialog box, and then to the Model dialog box. This is the default option.
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
The Model dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 5-8 Model dialog box
Clicking Next takes you to the Installation Type dialog box. To continue with the default installation sequence, see
Figure 5-19 Installation Type dialog box .
If you select Connected via the network in the Printer Connection dialog box, clicking Next takes you to the Network Setup dialog box.
Figure 5-9 Network Setup dialog box
Installation instructions 245
If you select Basic network setup for a PC or server , clicking Next takes you to the Identify
Printer dialog box. This is the default selection.
If you select Client setup for client-server printing , clicking Next initiates a series of question dialog boxes that help you determine the best connection-type option to use. This series begins with the Specify Network dialog box.
If you select Help me determine which setup is right for me , clicking Next takes you to the
Connection Type dialog box.
246
Figure 5-10 Connection Type dialog box
Clicking Parallel Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Cable Connection dialog box.
Clicking USB Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Cable Connection dialog box.
Clicking Network Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Print Job Management dialog box.
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-11 Cable Connection dialog box
Clicking A Jetdirect Print Server and then clicking Next takes you to the Print Job Management dialog box.
Clicking Another PC (not this PC) and then clicking Next takes you to the Recommended Network
Setup for client-server printing dialog box.
Figure 5-12 Print Job Management dialog box
Clicking either selection takes you to the Recommended Network Setup dialog box.
Installation instructions 247
Figure 5-13 Recommended Network Setup dialog box
Clicking Next takes you to the Identify Printer dialog box.
248
Figure 5-14 Identify Printer dialog box
Clicking Search from a list of detected printers (recommended) , and then clicking Next opens a screen that states that the installer is searching the network for available products to install.
If you are performing a network installation, and no printer is found, the Check Cable Connection dialog box appears, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving you the option of searching again or specifying a printer by address.
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
If a printer is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have been found on the network.
Clicking Specify a printer by address and then clicking Next takes you to the Specify Printer dialog box.
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
The Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 5-15 Specify Printer dialog box
You can specify a printer by selecting of the following options and typing in the required information:
■ Hardware Address (MAC)
■ IP Address
■ IP Hostname
■ IPX Address
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Found dialog box.
The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Installation instructions 249
Figure 5-16 Printer Found dialog box
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Selecting Yes, install this printer and clicking Next takes you to the Confirm Settings dialog box.
Clicking No, install a different printer takes you to the Check Cable Connection dialog box, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving you the option of searching again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address.
The Confirm Settings dialog box is show in the following illustration.
250
Figure 5-17 Confirm Settings dialog box
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Clicking the Change TCP/IP Settings button takes you to the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box and then on to the Set Network Protocol dialog box.
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Clicking Next takes you to the Installation Type dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
Figure 5-18 Set Network Protocol dialog box
Clicking Change Settings...
makes the text boxes active so that you can type a different IP Address,
Subnet Mask, or Gateway address.
Clicking Next takes you to the Confirm Settings dialog box and then to the Installation Type dialog box.
The Installation Type dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Installation instructions 251
252
Figure 5-19 Installation Type dialog box
NOTE The components of a Typical Installation might vary from product to product.
Clicking Typical Installation (Recommended) and then clicking Next takes you to the Printer
Name dialog box.
Clicking Minimum Installation and then clicking Next takes you to the Printer Name dialog box.
NOTE The Minimum Installation option installs only those components necessary for basic printing. It will become available after product release.
Clicking Custom Installation and then clicking Next opens the Features dialog box.
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-20 Features dialog box
A red X in the icon indicates that the feature is not installed. The installed icon appears when you select an installation state for that feature.
NOTE As shown in this screen shot, the PCL 5 driver is not an available option in this installation program. HP PCL 5 drivers must be installed using the Add Printer wizard.
Clicking the Space button opens the Disk Space Requirements dialog box, which shows you the available space on your hard drive and advises you if there is not enough space for the features you have selected.
Clicking Next opens the Printer Name dialog box.
Installation instructions 253
Figure 5-21 Printer Name dialog box
Selecting the Use this printer as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box sets the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer as your default printer.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Sharing dialog box.
254
Figure 5-22 Printer Sharing dialog box
NOTE The Printer Sharing dialog box does not appear if your computer is running
Windows 98 or Windows Me.
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Clicking Not shared and then clicking Next takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box or the Installation Type dialog box.
Clicking Share as: causes the text box to become active. Typing the share name and then clicking
Next takes you to the Client Driver Support dialog box.
NOTE When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you share the printer on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems by selecting Share as , you must type a name. You can also provide additional print driver support for other operating systems.
Figure 5-23 Client Driver Support dialog box
The Client Driver Support dialog box does not appear if the computer is running Windows 98 or
Windows Me. The Windows 95/98/Me check box allows you to share this printer with Windows 95,
98 or Me systems. When selected, the installation program installs the driver for those systems onto your computer. When users on those other systems select this shared printer, the correct driver is downloaded to them.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
Installation instructions 255
Figure 5-24 Printer Location and Comment dialog box
In the Location text box, you can type the physical location of the printer. In the Comment text box, you can type any additional information that might be helpful to users.
Clicking Next takes you to the Ready to Install dialog box.
256
Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box
Clicking Install starts the installation process.
When installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following illustration.
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-26 Finish dialog box
Clicking Restart Now turns your machine off and then on again, and installation is complete. If you click Restart Later , installation is complete only after you power down and restart your machine.
Custom Installation
Figure 5-27 Features dialog box, custom installation
Installation instructions 257
258
NOTE The features available in a custom installation might vary from product to product.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 computers running a terminal server do not support the HP Toolbox option.
The appearance of the Features dialog box might vary, depending on the product and the connection type.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Name dialog box.
If you selected Custom Installation in the Installation Type dialog box, the following options are available in the Features dialog box:
■ hp LaserJet 4250/4350 PCL 6 Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
■ hp LaserJet 42504350 PS Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
■ hp LaserJet toolbox (for network installations)
■ Screen Fonts
■ Install Notes
■ User Guide
Installing print drivers by using the Add Printer feature
Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the Add Printer feature of Windows:
1 Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2 Go to the Add a printer feature in Windows.
In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, and then click Printers and Faxes . The Printers and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer . The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
In Windows NT, Windows 9x, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop, click Settings , click
Printers and Faxes and then click Add a printer . The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
3 Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the printer. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process.
If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding
64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers are included on the software CD-ROM. Use the following steps to install a print driver by using the Add Printer feature.
1 Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2 Click Start on the desktop, click Settings , click Printers and Faxes and then click Add a printer . The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
3 Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the product. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process.
4 Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the following files on the software CD:
To install the PCL 6 driver for the HP LaserJet 4250 printer, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6\hpc4250c.inf
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
To install the PCL 6 driver for the HP LaserJet 4350 printer, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6\hpc4350c.inf
To install the PCL 5e driver for the HP LaserJet 4250 printer, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6\hpc4250c.inf
To install the PCL 5e driver for the HP LaserJet 4350 printer, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6\hpc4350c.inf
To install the PS driver for the HP LaserJet 4250 printer, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PS\hpc4250c.inf
To install the PS driver for the HP LaserJet 4350 printer, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PS\hpc4350c.inf
5 Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process.
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard to customize the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 print driver installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file.
To start the utility, click installer customization wizard on the main menu of the software CD browser. Using this option, administrators can create a silent (unattended) installer that is customized with any of the following selections:
■ Language
■ Operating system
■ Print drivers
■ Components
NOTE For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the HP Device
Installer Customization Wizard . This document (CUSTOMIZATIONDOC.RTF) is available on the printing-system software CD at the root of the <language> folder.
Running the installer customization wizard
Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file
(RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be edited for system configuration differences directly in the RESPONSE.INI file. The Installer HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard , available on the printing-system software CD at the root of the <language> folder, provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file.
To run the installer customization wizard
1 Insert the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2 In the CD browser main screen, click installer customization wizard .
3 Choose the setup language you wish to use. The installer automatically detects the language that your computer system uses and presents this selection as the default. Click OK to continue.
You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the drop-down menu.
Installation instructions 259
260
The Installer Customization Wizard starts automatically. To complete the installation, follow the instructions in the dialog boxes, as described in the following section.
Dialogs
The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the CD. It can be launched from the CD browser, depending on product-specific instantiation. It runs separately from MSI with its own interface.
The Choose Setup Language dialog box, the InstallShield Wizard dialog box, and the Preparing to Install dialog box appear the same as they appear in the standard installer. After these dialog boxes, the Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box appears.
Figure 5-28 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box
Clicking Next takes you to the Language dialog box.
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-29 Language dialog box
NOTE The customized installer limits all system installations of the product to the language that is selected in the Language dialog box. The maintenance mode on systems where installation has been completed by using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer
Customization Wizard installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new product must be installed to restore the option to install other languages.
The language that you selected is installed on users' computers regardless of the language of the text in the dialog boxes (as specified in the Choose a language dialog box earlier). The Language dialog box defaults to the language that was selected in the Choose a language dialog box, but any language (that is available on the CD) can be chosen for the customized installer. The language choice is recorded in the response file.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Port dialog box.
Installation instructions 261
262
Figure 5-30 Printer Port dialog box
Clicking Queue Name\Path makes a text field available for a Queue entry. Click the Browse button to navigate to a printer to record the path.
Clicking Local Port and then clicking Next takes you to the Connector Type dialog box, which is similar to the Connection Type dialog box that appears during a standard installation. However, the
Connector Type dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support. It also includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system where the port will be used.
Clicking New TCP/IP Port or New IPX Port and then clicking Next takes you to the Specify Printer dialog box.
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-31 Specify Printer dialog box
Clicking IP Address: makes a field available for typing the IP address for the printer. You can only use numerals in this field. If this option is selected, at least one digit must be typed in the IP Address field to prevent an error message from appearing, asking for a valid IP address.
Clicking IP Hostname: makes a field available for typing the IP hostname for the printer. You can use any characters in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If this option is selected, at least one character must be typed in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error message from appearing, asking for a valid IP hostname.
Clicking IPX Address: makes a field available for typing the IPX address of the printer.
Clicking Hardware Address: makes a field available for typing the hardware address of the printer. It accepts any characters but limits the entry to 13 characters.
The Hardware Address: option also creates an option to configure a new port. If you type a hardware address and click Next in the Specify Printer dialog box with Configure a new IP port selected, the IP Settings dialog box opens and you can set up the new port.
Clicking any of the options and then clicking Next takes you to either the IP Settings dialog box or the Model dialog box, depending on your selection.
Installation instructions 263
Figure 5-32 IP Settings dialog box
NOTE The Installer Customization Wizard does not validate that the printer or any of the printer identification entries actually exists on the network, because the customized installer can be used on a separate network.
Typing the appropriate information and then clicking Next takes you to the New IPX Port dialog box.
The New IPX Port selection in the Printer Port dialog box behaves the same way that the New TCP/
IP Port selection behaves: the Specify Printer dialog box opens with the same options, each with the same results.
264
Figure 5-33 Model dialog box
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
After the options in the identification or port setup dialog boxes are completed, the Model dialog box appears.
The model selection can affect which features are available for the installation. It can also affect driver defaults, depending on the product-specific instantiation.
Clicking Next takes you to the Features dialog box.
Figure 5-34 Features dialog box
Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other feature selection. It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver.
Clicking Next takes you to the Driver Configuration dialog box.
Installation instructions 265
Figure 5-35 Driver Configuration dialog box
It is possible to supply a preconfigured driver in the customized installer if the driver supports it. You can use the preconfigured driver to place default settings on the printer that is installed. If a driver that supports this feature is selected in the Features dialog box, the Driver Configuration dialog box appears.
Clicking Yes and then clicking Next opens a list of all printing preferences and device options for the product.
Clicking No and then clicking Next takes you to the Printer Name dialog box.
266
Figure 5-36 Driver Configuration dialog box
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Any setting in this dialog box, including those on the Device Settings tab, can be preset before the printer is installed (subject to the normal driver constraints).
Clicking Next opens either the Preconfigure Printer dialog box for another driver that supports preconfiguration (if any), or the Printer Name dialog box.
Figure 5-37 Printer Name dialog box
The Default Printer: drop-down menu lists only those drivers that are selected in the Features dialog box.
The Use this printer as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box is selected by default. Clear this box if you do not want to use the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer as the default printer.
Clicking Next opens the Printer Sharing dialog box.
Installation instructions 267
Figure 5-38 Printer Sharing dialog box
Clicking Share as: opens a field for naming the product as it will appear on the network.
Clicking Next with Not Shared selected takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
Clicking Share as: and then clicking Next takes you to the Client Driver Support dialog box.
268
Figure 5-39 Client Driver Support dialog box
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
NOTE This dialog box provides options for selecting OS-specific drivers to add to the installation to provide for Point and Print driver vending on the system. Either or both optional drivers can be selected.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
Figure 5-40 Printer Location and Comment dialog box
Use the Location: text field to type a description of the physical location of the printer. The field is limited to 241 characters.
Use the Comment: text field to type any other helpful text such as capabilities about the printer. The field is limited to 241 characters.
Clicking Next takes you to the Custom Installer Location dialog box.
Installation instructions 269
Figure 5-41 Custom Installer Location dialog box
NOTE The location for the installer package defaults to the drive that the system user opened last.
Clicking Change opens the Change Current Destination Folder dialog box to navigate to the drive that you want.
Clicking Install after you have specified a location (or browsed to a location) starts the file copy process and takes you to the Installing dialog box.
270
Figure 5-42 Change Current Destination Folder dialog box
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
NOTE Several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the directory that appears in the Folder Name field. These files collectively occupy approximately 37 MB on the directory. Be sure that enough space is available on the directory before continuing.
After you select a location, click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box. The location appears in the Folder name field.
Click the New Folder button to create a new folder.
Figure 5-43 Installing dialog box
This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar reaches the end.
Installation instructions 271
272
Figure 5-44 Finish dialog box
Clicking Finish closes the Finish dialog box and exits the Installer Customization Wizard.
NOTE Depending on the type of installation and options that you select, you either will or will not be presented with some additional steps when you click Finish .
Distribution
The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the CD, except that it is limited to one language, and it contains the features and options that you selected.
The installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to run the installation without being prompted.
You can perform the silent installation in two ways:
■ customized silent installer
■ command-line silent installer
The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the installer package. The name cannot contain spaces; spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the installer package.
End users cannot customize the command-line silent installer. The silent installer installs only the printing-system components that are included in the typical installation. For more information, see the
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard . This document (CustomizationDoc.rtf) is available on the printing-system software CD at the root of the <language> folder.
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and 2003
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a function of the Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel® X 86 processor types. Any other processor types must use Windows NT 4.0 drivers from Microsoft.
To install the print driver on a Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 server, you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows NT 4.0 print driver on the Windows NT 4.0 server (or the Windows 2000 print driver on the Windows 2000 server), you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows NT 4.0 Printer .INF file (or the
Windows 2000 Printer .INF file) must contain the same product name as the Windows 98 or
Windows Me printer .INF file.
Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 98 or
Windows Me PS driver V4.0 or later.
In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers running the same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server.
However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print driver that is different from the one on the print server.
With Windows NT 4.0, print drivers are executed in kernel mode. A kernel mode process runs in a specially privileged part of the operating system that gives the process access to all of the system resources. Consequently, a misbehaving driver can cause serious system stability problems, including operating system crashes.
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with
Windows 2000 and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user -mode processes. User-mode drivers execute in a protected part of the operating system just like all of the normal end-user processes and software programs. A user-mode print driver that misbehaves is capable of crashing only the process in which it is running, and cannot crash the whole operating system. Because access to critical system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased.
Setting a default printer
This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
1 In Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, and Windows 2000 OSs, click Start , click
Settings , and then click Printers . In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start , click
Control Panel , click Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware devices (Windows XP Home).
2 Right-click the product that you want to set as the default printer.
3 Click Set As Default . A check mark appears next to the menu option.
Installation instructions 273
274 5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and
UNIX operating systems
This section provides system requirements and procedures for installing and removing the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing-system software for supported operating systems other than
Windows. It also provides information about font support and system modifications. The following operating systems are supported:
■ Macintosh
■ Linux
■ UNIX
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
275
System requirements
The following are system requirements for installing and using the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printingsystem software on each of these supported operating systems.
Macintosh
■ PowerPC processor
■ Macintosh OS 9.
x or later or Mac OS X (10.1 or later)
■ 256 MB RAM
■ 110 MB available disk space
Linux
For information about Linux support for the product, see the HP Linux Web site:
■ www.hp.com/go/linux .
UNIX
For information about UNIX support for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer, see the following Web site:
■ www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
276 6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Macintosh
The following sections contain information about using HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printing software for the Macintosh OS.
Macintosh component descriptions
The product includes the following software for Macintosh computers:
■ PPDs for Mac OS 9.
x and Mac OS X (10.1 and later)
■ PDEs for Mac OS X only (10.1 and later)
HP LaserJet PPDs
In Mac OS 9.
x , postscript printer definition (PPD) files for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer are installed to the Printer Descriptions folder, which is in the Extensions folder within the System folder. In Mac OS X, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/
Resources:<lang>.lproj
, where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder.
PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the product. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the printing software CD.
For Mac OS 9.
x , the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver must be installed to use the PPD file. Use the Apple
LaserWriter 8 driver that came with your Macintosh. For Mac OS X, use Print Center to print.
PDEs
Printer dialog extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X only, V10.1 and later) that provide access to product features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.
HP Toolbox
The HP Toolbox is a series of Web pages and supporting Windows-based and Macintosh-based software programs (for OS/2 only, V10.2 and later). The HP Toolbox provides links to product status information and enables you to receive alerts for product events.
For more information about the HP Toolbox, see the HP Toolbox section of this guide.
HP Embedded Web Server
Macintosh OS 9.
x and later operating systems support the HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS).
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. Use the HP EWS to perform the following tasks:
■ Name the product, assign it to a zone on the network, and change product settings.
■ Set a password for the product.
■ From the computer, lock out functions on the control panel to prevent unauthorized access (see the printing software help).
Macintosh 277
278
Install notes
This text file contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical assistance.
Online help
This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with Mac
OS 9.
x HP products. The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center.
Screen fonts
These screen fonts are available only for Macintosh computers and Macintosh-compatible computers
(Mac OS classic only). Because the screen fonts match your printing fonts, you can see onscreen how your printed page looks.
Font support
To ensure that you can use all of the installed fonts with the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer, the
Macintosh printing system includes the standard 35 screen fonts in 11 families:
■ Avant Garde
■ Helvetica Narrow
■ Times
■ Bookman
■ New Century Schoolbook
■ Zapf Chancery
■ Courier
■ Palatino
■ Zapf Dingbats
■ Helvetica
■ Symbol
The Macintosh printing system also includes the HP 45 XPS font families:
■ Clarendon Condensed Bold
■ Symbol
■ Albertus Medium
■ Coronet
■ Times New Roman
■ Antique Olive
■ Courier
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Macintosh
■ Univers
■ Arial
■ Garamond
■ Univers Condensed
■ CG Omega
■ Letter Gothic
■ Wingdings
■ CG Times
■ Marigold
The following bitmap screen fonts reside on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer:
■ ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
■ Helvetica
■ Palatino
■ ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
■ Helvetica Bold
■ Palatino Bold
■ ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
■ Helvetica Bold Oblique
■ Palatino Bold Italic
■ ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
■ Helvetica Oblique
■ Palatino Italic
■ ITC Bookman Demi
■ Helvetica Narrow
■ Symbol
■ ITC Bookman Demi Italic
■ Helvetica Narrow Bold
■ Times Bold
■ ITC Bookman Light
■ Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
■ Times Bold Italic
279
280
■ ITC Bookman Light Italic
■ Helvetica Narrow Oblique
■ Times Italic
■ Courier
■ New Century Schoolbook Bold
■ Times Roman
■ Courier Bold
■ New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
■ ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
■ Courier Bold Oblique
■ New Century Schoolbook Italic
■ ITC Zapf Dingbats
■ Courier Oblique
■ New Century Schoolbook Roman
The following fonts reside on the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer, but can be used by Macintosh platforms only if you install additional screen fonts. You can either use these screen fonts directly from the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer software CD or obtain them from www.hp.com/support/ lj4250 , or www.hp.com/support/lj4350 .
■ Albertus Extra Bold
■ CG Times Italic
■ Marigold
■ Albertus Medium
■ Clarendon Condensed Bold
■ Symbol
■ Antique Olive
■ Coronet
■ Times New Roman
■ Antique Olive Bold
■ Courier
■ Times New Roman Bold
■ Antique Olive Italic
■ Courier Bold
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Macintosh
■ Times New Roman Bold Italic
■ Arial Courier Bold Oblique
■ Times New Roman Italic
■ Arial Bold
■ Courier Italic
■ Univers Bold
■ Arial Bold Italic
■ Garamond Antiqua
■ Univers Bold Italic
■ Arial Italic
■ Garamond Halbfett
■ Univers Condensed Bold Italic
■ CG Omega
■ Garamond Kursiv
■ Univers Condensed Medium
■ CG Omega Bold
■ Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
■ Univers Condensed Medium Italic
■ CG Omega Bold Italic
■ Letter Gothic
■ Univers Medium
■ CG Omega Italic
■ Letter Gothic Bold
■ Univers Medium Italic
■ CG Times
■ Letter Gothic Italic
■ Univers Italic
■ CG Times Bold
■ CG Times Bold Italic
■ Wingdings
■ CG Times Bold Italic
281
282
Installing the Macintosh printing system
On a Macintosh-compatible computer, the installation procedures are the same for a network administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the printer.
NOTE If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct connection to communicate with the product. You must set up the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer, connect it to the computer or network, and turn it on before the software is installed.
Macintosh OS systems do not support parallel connections. You can use a cross-over
Ethernet cable for a direct connection to a computer running the Macintosh OS.
The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the appropriate language for the operating system that is being used, and then use the installer program for that language.
NOTE
Detailed installation steps can be found in Mac OS Classic installation or
.
To install the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS
1 Insert the CD that came with the Macintosh printing-system software into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp LaserJet 4X50
CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.
2 Open the HP LaserJet Installers folder. Find the Installer icon for the appropriate language.
Double-click the Installer icon to launch the Installer. In the opening dialog, click Continue .
NOTE The Continue button appears only after you type the "Admin" password in the
Authenticate dialog box (OS X, V10.1 and later only).
3 The main hp LaserJet Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software installation.
NOTE If you are installing the printing-system software on a Macintosh OS X system, please be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled.
4 When software installation is complete, click Quit . Select one of the following options to finish setting up your product:
● Set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9.
x
● Set up a printer with Mac OS X
Setting up an AppleTalk networked Printer with Mac OS 9.
x
1 Open the Chooser from within the Apple Menu .
2 Click LaserWriter 8 on the left side of the Chooser dialog box.
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Macintosh
3 Click the appropriate Zone to select it, if required.
4 Click your product name from the list that appears on the right side of the Chooser dialog box, and then click Create .
Setting up a Printer with Mac OS X
1 In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Print Center .
2 Click Add (in Mac OS X 10.2) or Add Printer (in Mac OS X 10.1).
3 From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for your product.
4 Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for your product.
For example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select your product zone; or if you are using IP Printing, type in an IP address.
NOTE If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a PPD file, click the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP , and then click LaserJet 4250 for the
HP LaserJet 4250 printer, or . LaserJet 4350 for the HP LaserJet 4350 printer.
5 Click Add .
6 To configure installable options in Mac OS X 10.2 and later, such as a duplexing unit or optional paper trays, click the appropriate product icon in the Print Center Printer List window. Select
Show Info from the Printers menu, and then select the appropriate options from the Installable
Options popup menu.
7 Configure the options, and then click Apply Changes .
Setting up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.
x
1 Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.
2 Click Printer (LPR) , and then click OK .
3 Click Change in the LPR Printer Selection area.
4 Click the appropriate IP address and Queue, and then click OK .
5 Click Change and scroll through the list of products.
6 Click HP LaserJet 4250/4350 , and then click Select .
7 Click Create .
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash .
In-box disk layout
The Macintosh Printing System consists of two files: the HP LaserJet Installer - Integrated installer program and a Toolbox installer program.
283
Mac OS Classic installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS
Classic.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This subsection provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the
Easy Install (the typical installation option).
First you will see the initial install screen. Click Continue to begin the install.
Figure 6-1 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box
Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Installer dialog box.
284
Figure 6-2 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install
Location: to specify a location.
You can also select the Custom Install option from the drop-down menu at the upper-left (shown in the following illustration). Easy Install is the default.
Click Read Me to open the installer readme file.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
Figure 6-3 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install
Location: to specify a location.
Select which of the available components to install by using the check boxes in the list.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Macintosh
Figure 6-4 Installing dialog box
This dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the installation file copy process.
285
When installation is finished, a pop-up message appears stating that the installation was successful.
Figure 6-5 Installation was successful dialog box
Click Quit to exit the Installer. The Printer Setup Assistant opens.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for the HP Screen Font
Installer.
286
Figure 6-6 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash screen dialog box
Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Screen Fonts dialog box.
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Figure 6-7 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog box (1 of 2)
Click Install to start the installation.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
When you click Install , an installation progress bar dialog box appears briefly. Click Stop to interrupt the installation file copy process.
Figure 6-8 Installation was successful dialog box
Click Quit to exit the Installer.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer.
Mac OS X installation
This section provides information about the installation dialog-box sequences for the Mac OS X operating system.
Main installation dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy
Install (the typical installation option).
Macintosh
Figure 6-9 Installer CD-ROM icon
If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, doubleclick the hp LaserJet 4X50 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.
287
Figure 6-10 hp LaserJet 4X50 folder
In the hp Laserjet 4X50 folder, double click the hp LaserJet Installers folder to open it.
288
Figure 6-11 hp LaserJet Installers folder
In the hp LaserJet Installers folder, double-click the installer icon for the language you want to use.
This begins the install process.
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
When you run the installer you might first see the Authenticate dialog box (OS X, V10.1 and later only).
Figure 6-12 Authenticate dialog box
Enter the correct password and click OK to continue. The install splash screen appears.
Macintosh
Figure 6-13 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box
Click Continue . The software License dialog box appears.
289
Figure 6-14 License dialog box
Click Print...
to open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and print a copy of the license agreement.
Click Save As...
to open the system Save dialog box and save the license agreement to disk.
Click Decline to end the installation process and close the installer.
Click Accept to continue the installation. The hp LaserJet Installer dialog box appears.
290 6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Figure 6-15 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click the Install
Location drop-down menu to specify a location.
You can also select a Custom Install option from the drop-down menu at upper left (shown in the following illustration).
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
Macintosh
Figure 6-16 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
Select the install location by using the Install Location drop-down menu (if the desired location is different from "Macintosh HD").
291
Select the components that you want to install by using the check boxes in the list.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
292
Figure 6-17 Install verification dialog box
Before the installation begins, a verification screen appears. It verifies what will be installed and lists the additional steps that will need to be taken to install the printer. Click OK to continue.
Figure 6-18 Installing dialog box
The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the installation file copy process.
When installation is complete, a popup message appears stating that the installation was successful.
Figure 6-19 Installation success message
Click Quit to exit the installer.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
7 Engineering detail
Introduction
This section presents engineering detail for the following topics:
●
●
Introduction 293
Media attributes
This section includes the following information about media attributes:
■ Paper sources and destinations
■ Paper-tray configurations
■ Paper-source commands
■ Media types and sizes
■ PCL 6 custom paper sizes
Paper sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional paper sources and destinations for the
HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer:
Table 7-1 HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer paper sources and destinations
Paper sources
Paper destinations
Multipurpose tray (tray 1)
500-sheet paper tray (tray 2)
500-sheet paper tray (tray 3)
500-sheet paper tray or 1500-sheet
HCI paper tray (tray 4)
500-sheet paper tray or 1500-sheet
HCI paper tray (tray 5)
75-sheet envelope feeder
Main output bin
500-sheet stacker
500-sheet stapler/stacker
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional (tray 3 must be installed before tray 4 can be installed)
Optional (trays 3 and 4 must be installed before tray 5 can be installed)
Optional
Standard
Optional
Optional (standard on the
HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl and
HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer models)
Paper-tray configurations
All models of the HP LaserJet 4250 and HP LaserJet 4350 printers come with a 100-sheet standard multipurpose tray (tray 1) and a 500-sheet paper tray (tray 2). The HP LaserJet 4250tn and
HP LaserJet 4350tn, HP LaserJet 4250dtn and HP LaserJet 4350dtn, and HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl and HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer models come with an additional 500-sheet paper tray (tray 3).
Trays 4 and 5 (either a 500-sheet paper tray or a 1500-sheet high-capacity input [HCI] paper tray) are optional on all models.
The following table indicates the possible paper tray configurations for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer:
294 7 Engineering detail
Table 7-2 Media tray configurations for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer
Product
HP LaserJet 4250 and
HP LaserJet 4350 printers
HP LaserJet 4250n and
HP LaserJet 4350n printers
Tray number
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
HP LaserJet 4250tn and
HP LaserJet 4350tn printers
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
HP LaserJet 4250dtn and
HP LaserJet 4350dtn printers
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl and
HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printers
Tray 5
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Tray type
Multipurpose tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray or 1500sheet HCI tray
500-sheet tray or 1500sheet HCI tray
Multipurpose tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray or 1500sheet HCI tray
500-sheet tray or 1500sheet HCI tray
Multipurpose tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray or 1500sheet HCI tray
500-sheet tray or 1500sheet HCI tray
Multipurpose tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray or 1500sheet HCI tray
500-sheet tray or 1500sheet HCI tray
Multipurpose tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray or 1500sheet HCI tray
500-sheet tray or 1500sheet HCI tray
Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Standard/optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Media attributes
NOTE A duplexing unit is standard on the HP LaserJet 4250dtn and HP LaserJet 4350dtn, and HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl and HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl printer models.
295
296
Paper-source commands
The PCL 6 escape sequence for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource . See the following table for values of #. For example, " ubyte 4 MediaSource " is the command for tray 2.
The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l8H is the command for tray 4.
Table 7-3 Paper-source commands
Paper source PCL 6 ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string"
PCL 5
Esc&l#H
Postscript
/MediaPosition # or null
Tray 1
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (1500-sheet)
Tray 5 (4000-sheet)
3
4
5
7
TRAY5
4
1
5
8
9
3
0
1
4
38
Auto Select
Manual feed in tray 1
1
2
7
2 null
3
1
2
Envelope feeder 6 6 2
For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY5"
MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for Tray 5.
Tray 5 is optional for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer.
Media types and sizes
The tables in this section provide information about media features, media attributes, and paperhandling constraints for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer.
Driver features and attributes
The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: dropdown menu on the Paper tab. The drop-down list order can vary, depending on the product and operating system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.
Table 7-4 Supported features and attributes by driver
Paper sizes
Letter
16K
Width
216 mm
(8.5 inches)
197 mm
(7.75 inches)
Height
279 mm
(11.0 inches)
273 mm
(10.75 inches)
PCL 6
"LETTER"
"ROC16K"
7 Engineering detail
Table 7-4 Supported features and attributes by driver (continued)
Width Height
8.5 x 13 216 mm 330 mm
8K
A3
A4
A5
B4 (JIS)
B5 (JIS)
Double Japan Postcard
Rotated
Envelope #10
Envelope B5
Envelope C5
Envelope DL
Envelope Monarch
Executive
Executive (JIS)
Legal
Custom (leading edge)
(4.12 inches)
176 mm
(6.93 inches)
162 mm
(6.38 inches)
110 mm
(4.33 inches)
98 mm
(3.87 inches)
184 mm
(7.25 inches)
216 mm
(8.5 inches)
216 mm
(8.5 inches)
Minimum:
(8.5 inches)
273 mm
(10.75 inches)
297 mm
(11.69 inches)
210 mm
(8.27 inches)
148 mm
(5.83 inches)
257 mm
(10.12 inches)
182 mm
(7.17 inches)
148 mm
(5.83 inches)
105 mm
(9.5 inches)
250 mm
(9.84 inches)
229 mm
(9.02 inches)
220 mm
(8.66 inches)
190 mm
(7.5 inches)
267 mm
(10.5 inches)
330 mm
(12.99 inches)
356 mm
(14.0 inches)
Minimum:
(12.99 inches)
394 mm
(15.50 inches)
420 mm
(16.54 inches)
297 mm
(11.69 inches)
210 mm
(8.27 inches)
364 mm
(14.33 inches)
257 mm
(10.12 inches)
200 mm
(7.87 inches)
241 mm
Media attributes
PCL 6
"8.5x13"
"ROC8K"
"A3"
"A4"
"A5"
"JIS B4"
"JIS B5"
"COM10"
"B5 ENV"
"C5"
"DL"
"MONARCH"
"EXEC"
"JISEXEC"
"LEGAL"
4
297
298
Table 7-4 Supported features and attributes by driver (continued)
Paper sizes
Width Height
76.2 mm 127 mm
(other edge)
(3.0 inches)
Maximum:
(5.0 inches)
Maximum:
PCL 6
215 mm 355.6 mm
1
2
3
4
(8.5 inches) (14.0 inches)
For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100,100.
The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte array(String)MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."
In Windows NT 4.0, this paper size is treated as a custom size.
For custom sizes, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions (for example, for 8 by 9 inch custom size,
"real32_8.000000 9.000000 CustomMediaSize").
Table 7-5 Supported input media types
Input media types
(postscript string)
Tray
1
Tray 2, 3, and 4
(500sheet)
Tray 3 and 4
(500sheet)
Tray 3 and 4
(1500sheet)
Duplexin g unit
Manual duplex
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead Y
Transparen cy
Y
Prepunched Y
Labels Y
Y
Y
Bond
Recycled
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Color
Cardstock
Envelope
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
1
2
Rough Y Y Y Y Y Y
Tray 1 accepts cardstock between 164 g/m 2 (45 lb.) and 200 g/m 2 (53 lb.).
Light paper is between 60 g/m 2 (16 lb.) and 74 g/m 2 (20 lb.).
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Envelope feeder
Y
Y
Y
Y
HP
Stacker or HP
Stacker/
Stapler
Staple
Y
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
PCL 6 custom paper sizes
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP LaserJet 4250/4350 printer:
7 Engineering detail
Table 7-6 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (1500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Stacker, Stapler/Stacker
Dimensions
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Minimum Maximum
76.2 mm (3 inches)
127.0 mm (5 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.27 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
210.0 mm (8.27 inches) 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported Custom sizes not supported
148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
210.0 mm (8.27 inches) 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Paper type commands
The PCL 5e escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters plus 1, for a total of 6.
In order for the command to work correctly, at least one of the media trays in the product must be configured at the control panel for the paper type that is used in the command.
NOTE Some paper type options that are listed in the following table might not be defined in the print driver.
Table 7-7 Paper-type commands n#
5
9
11
7
6
11
11
13
6
11
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Paper type
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
Cardstock
Media attributes 299
Table 7-7 Paper-type commands (continued)
Esc& n# Wd Paper type
Esc&
Esc&
9
6
Wd
Wd
Envelope
Light
1
2
Esc& 6 Wd Rough
You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.
The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an uppercase "S".
300 7 Engineering detail
HP Toolbox
This section presents engineering detail for the following topics:
●
Enabling or disabling HP Toolbox support
●
Manually uninstalling HP Toolbox in Macintosh Operating Systems
Enabling or disabling HP Toolbox support
The registry entry HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run, with the value
HP Status controls the HP Toolbox. This entry runs HPSTATUS.EXE every time that the system is started. When you close the HP Toolbox by right-clicking the Toolbox tray icon and selecting Exit , you are prompted to restart the HP Toolbox on startup. If you select No, don't start automatically , this entry is removed.
To start status manually, select the Start|Run menu, and type HPSTATUS .
Manually uninstalling HP Toolbox in Macintosh Operating Systems
HP Toolbox must be uninstalled manually in a Macintosh OS. To uninstall HP Toolbox manually, follow these instructions:
1 Delete the following program:
Library/Startup Items/hp ToolboxStartup
NOTE HP Toolbox cannot be uninstalled when it is in use. Because HP Toolbox runs at startup time, either quit the program before deleting it, or move it into the trash bin and restart the computer.
2 Delete the following file:
Applications/Utilities/hp toolbox.webloc 3
3 Navigate to the Library/Printers/hp/Utilities/folder, and delete all files that have "Toolbox" in the name.
HP Toolbox 301
302 7 Engineering detail
Index
Symbols/Numerics
% of Normal Size setting
A
About button, PCL traditional
accessibility
accessories, automatic
ADA (Americans with Disabilities
Adobe Acrobat Reader
Advanced Printing Features
Advanced tab
Allow Scaling from Large Paper,
alternative letterhead mode
Americans with Disabilities Act
application settings
ASCII output protocol, PS
B
Back Cover settings
PCL traditional drivers 124, 128
Back to Front printing, unidrivers
Basics tab, PCL traditional drivers
bidirectional communication
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
binary output protocol, PS
binding settings
bins
PS Emulation Driver selection
black, printing all text as
PCL traditional drivers 108, 110
booklet printing
PCL traditional drivers settings
C
Cable Connection dialog box,
cardstock, paper type commands
CD-ROM
installing Macintosh printing-
installing Windows printing-
Change Current Destination
Choose Setup Language dialog
Client Driver Support dialog box,
Windows
collation settings
PCL traditional driver mopier
command-line printing
Macintosh 74 networks, Windows 74
command-line silent install for
commands, paper
Index 303
Configuration Page, HP
Configure Device page, HP
Configure tab, PCL traditional
Connection type dialog box,
connectivity bidirectional communication
Network Setup dialog box,
Printer Connection dialog box,
constraint messages
context-sensitive help
control panel settings
Copy Count settings
covers, use different paper settings
Ctrl-D settings, PS Emulation
Custom Installation dialog box,
Custom Installer Location dialog
custom paper sizes, PCL
custom paper sizes, PCL unidrivers
D
default Print Task Quick Sets
Device Information page, HP
Device Settings tab
Device Status page, HP
dialog boxes, printing-system software installation
DIMMs, fonts
PCL traditional driver settings
directory structure, software CD-
disabling
disk space requirements
Document Options
Document Options, PS Emulation
documentation
Print Task Quick Set for use guide, PCL traditional driver
Print Task Quick Set for use
Documentation tab, HP Toolbox
double-sided printing
PCL traditional driver settings
downloading
Driver Configuration dialog box,
drivers
availability by operating system
bidirectional communication
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration
installable options support 80
media supported 296 paper source commands 296
Point and Print installation 273
Postcript-specific features 89
Print Task Quick Set support
PS Emulation Driver features
304
duplexing unit
PCL traditional driver settings
PS Emulation Driver settings
E
E-mail Server page, HP
Economode
Edit Other Links page, HP
Effects tab
EIO Jetdirect page, printing 34
embedded Web server. See HP
Embedded Web Server
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Novell NetWare operating
Windows operating systems
envelope feeder
PCL traditional driver settings
PS Emulation Driver settings
envelopes, paper type commands
escape sequences
EWS. See HP Embedded Web
Server
exporting driver parameters 31
External Fonts settings, PCL
F
Features dialog box, Windows
file layout for software CD-ROM
Finishing tab
firmware
determining current level 62 downloading 62
First Page paper settings
Fit to Page settings
Flip Pages Up
Font Substitution Table, PS
fonts
configuring for watermarks 115
DIMM settings, PCL traditional
Send TrueType as Bitmap,
Send TrueType as Bitmap,
substitution table, PS
substitution table, PS
Form to Tray Assignment
Front Cover settings
Front to Back printing, unidrivers
FTP command-line printing
FTP firmware updates
G
Graphic settings
Graphic settings, PCL traditional
guides. See documentation
H hard disk
PS Emulation Driver settings
Index 305
help
operating systems supported
HP Device Installer Customization
HP Driver Preconfiguration
operating systems and drivers
status, PCL traditional drivers
HP Embedded Web Server
Device Information page 35, 38
Settings tab 38 time settings 38
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
HP Jetdirect page, printing 34
HP LaserJet Screen Font Installer
HP LaserJet Utility
I
IBM operating systems, supported
Identify Printer dialog box,
HP Network Registry Agent
HP PCL traditional drivers. See
PCL traditional drivers
HP PCL unidrivers. See PCL unidrivers
HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver. See
PS Emulation Unidriver
HP Software License Agreement
HP Toolbox
bidirectional communication 28
Embedded Web Server, linking
uninstalling manually on
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver. See PS
Emulation Driver
HP Traditional Postscript Driver
HP Web Jetadmin
Driver Configuration Plugin 30
operating systems supported
HPNRA (HP Network Registry
Ignore Application Collation settings, PCL traditional drivers
Include types in application source
Incompatible Print Settings messages. See constraint messages
Information tab, HP Embedded
input trays. See trays
Installable Options
installation
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic
Installer Customization Wizard
Macintosh printing-system
system requirements for
Macintosh and Linux
system requirements for
Windows operating systems
Windows printing-system
Installation Type dialog box,
installers availability by operating system
IP Settings dialog box,
306
J
Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin
Job Storage enabling in PCL traditional
operating systems supported
Job Timeout settings, PS
L landscape orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 102, 140
Language dialog box,
languages
Choose Setup Language
Layout Options, unidrivers 180
letterhead mode
PCL traditional unidrivers 150
license agreement dialog box,
links, HP Embedded Web Server
Linux operating systems
local port command line printing,
localization, software components
logging in to HP Embedded Web
LPR commands
M
Macintosh operating systems
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic printing-system software
dialog boxes, Mac OS X printing-system software
directory structure, software
installing printing-system
software 282 network setup 282, 283
printing print-ready files with
setting up products with Mac
uninstalling printing-system
manuals. See documentation
media. See paper memory installation requirements for
Macintosh and Linux
installation requirements for
Windows operating systems
PCL traditional driver settings
PS Emulation Driver settings
messages, constraint
Microsoft Point and Print
Model dialog box, Windows
moire effect, handling 108, 110
Mopier settings
More Configuration Options, PCL
N n-up printing, PS Emulation Driver
name printer dialog box
Network Setup dialog box,
Networking tab, HP Embedded
networks
bidirectional communication
EIO Jetdirect page, printing 34
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Network protocol dialog box,
Point and Print installation 273
Recommended Network Setup
Windows printing-system
Index 307
Novell NetWare operating systems, Enterprise
NT Forms tab, PCL traditional
number of copies, setting
O online help. See help operating systems availability of software
bidirectional communication
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration
installable options support 80
Print Task Quick Set support
Optimizations option, PCL
Optional Paper Sources, PCL
orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 102, 140
Other Pages paper settings
output bins. See bins
Output Protocol settings, PS
Output Settings, PCL traditional
Output tab
P
Page Order settings
page orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 102, 140
Page Setup tab, PS Emulation
Pages per Sheet settings
paper alternative letterhead mode,
alternative letterhead mode,
custom sizes, PCL traditional
custom sizes, PCL traditional
custom sizes, PCL Unidriver
Include types in application
margins 298 margins, PCL 6 driver 298
Pages per Sheet settings, PCL
Pages per Sheet settings,
Print Document On settings,
Print Document On settings,
Print on Both Sides settings,
Print on Both Sides, PCL
PS Emulation Driver settings
Size is settings, PCL traditional
Size is settings, unidrivers 186
Source is settings, PCL
Source is settings, unidrivers
Type is settings, PCL
Type is settings, unidrivers 188
Paper Handling Options, PCL
Paper Options
paper trays. See trays
Paper/Output settings
Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 180
password, HP Embedded Web
PCL files, command-line printing
PCL traditional drivers
Allow Scaling from Large Paper
alternative letterhead mode
bidirectional communication
308
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Include types in application
installable options support 80
More Configuration Options
operating systems supported
Print Quality Details settings
PCL Unidrivers
PCL unidrivers
alternative letterhead mode
bidirectional communication
HP Driver Preconfiguration
installable options support 80
operating systems supported
Print Optimizations option 178
Services tab 216 status information 216
PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions)
PDF files
printing using HP Embedded
Percentage of Normal Size setting
PINs, Job Storage
Point and Print installation,
Windows printing-system
port selection dialog box, Windows
portrait orientation settings
Index 309
PCL traditional drivers 102, 140
PostScript Device settings 168
postscript documents, printing 35
PostScript Options, PS Emulation
Postscript printer description
PPD (postscript printer
Preparing to Install dialog box,
Print All Text as Black
PCL traditional drivers 108, 110
Print Document On settings
print drivers. See drivers
Print Job Management dialog box,
Print on Both Sides
PCL traditional driver settings
Print Optimizations option, PCL
Print Page Borders settings
Print Quality Details, PCL
Print Quality group box, unidrivers
Print Task Quick Sets, PCL traditional drivers
Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers
print-ready files
printing using HP Embedded
printing with HP LaserJet
Printer Connection dialog box,
printer control panel settings
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs)
Printer Features options, PS
Printer Location and Comment dialog box, Windows
Printer Name dialog box, Windows
Printer Port dialog box,
Printer Sharing dialog box,
Windows
printing
files using HP Embedded Web
files with HP LaserJet Utility 75
Private job settings
PRN files, printing 35 product support 35
Proof and Hold job settings
Properties tabs
protocols
PS Emulation Driver
bidirectional communication
HP Driver Preconfiguration
installable options support 80
operating systems supported
PostScript Device settings 168
PostScript Memory settings
310
PS Emulation Unidriver
bidirectional communication
HP Driver Preconfiguration
installable options support 80
operating systems supported
Services tab 216 status information 216
PS Emulation Unidrivers alternative letterhead mode
PS files, command-line printing 70
Q quality, print
Quick Copy job settings
Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick
Sets
R
Ready to Install dialog box,
Recommended Network Setup
regional versions for printing-
releasing Job Storage jobs 137,
remote firmware updates
determining current firmware
resizing options, driver support 85
Resizing Options, unidrivers 197
resolution
PCL traditional driver settings
RFU. See remote firmware updates
S
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature
Scale to Fit setting
Screen Fonts installer, Macintosh
screen-readable documentation
Security page, HP Embedded
Send Ctrl-D settings, PS
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
PCL traditional drivers 108, 110
Set Network Protocol dialog box,
settings
continuous export 31 locking 31
Index 311
Print Task Quick Sets,
Print Task Quick Sets,
Settings tab, HP Embedded Web
shading, configuring for
sharing setup dialog box, Windows
silent installation
sizes, paper
PCL traditional driver settings
Print on Both Sides settings,
Print on Both sides, PCL
PS Emulation Driver settings
Source is settings
sources, paper. See trays
Specify Printer dialog box,
Stapling Options, PS Emulation
status
storage, job enabling in PCL traditional
operating systems supported
Stored job settings
substitution table for fonts, PS
supplies
AutoSend page, HP
viewing status 35 support, product 35
system requirements
T
TBCP output protocol, PS
text files, command-line printing
text, printing all as black
PCL traditional drivers 108, 110
time settings, HP Embedded Web
timeout settings, PS Emulation
Toolbox
bidirectional communication 28
Embedded Web Server, linking
uninstalling manually on
traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers; PS Emulation
Driver transparencies, paper type
trays
Installable Options, PS
PCL traditional driver settings
PS Emulation Driver Form to
Source is settings, PCL
Source is settings, unidrivers
unidriver Form to Tray
troubleshooting firmware updates
Troubleshooting tab, HP Toolbox
TrueType font settings
Send as Bitmap, PCL
Send as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers
substitution table, PS
two-sided printing
PCL traditional driver settings
TXT files, command-line printing
types, paper
312
Include in application source
PCL traditional drivers settings
Print on Both Sides settings,
Print on Both sides, PCL
Typical Installation
U unattended installation
unidrivers
alternative letterhead mode
bidirectional communication
operating systems supported
Services tab 216 status information 216
uninstalling Macintosh printing-
UNIX operating systems
updating firmware remotely. See remote firmware update
Use Different Paper/Covers
User Guide
Print Task Quick Set, PCL
Print Task Quick Set, unidrivers
W
Wait Timeout settings, PS
Watermarks settings
Web Jetadmin. See HP Web
Jetadmin
Web sites
links, HP Embedded Web
Welcome dialog box, Windows
What's this? Help
Windows operating systems availability of software
command-line printing, local
command-line printing,
custom installation, printing-
dialog boxes, Typical Installation
directory structure, software
Index 313
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Installer Customization Wizard
installing printing software 238
NT Forms tab, PCL traditional
PCL traditional drivers features
Point and Print installation 273
PS Emulation Driver features
PS emulation fonts supported
314
© 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, LP www.hp.com
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement